Тамнцови Формати

ХАРАКТЕРНИ ТАНЦИ

Танцови композиции носещи характера на народния танц на различните националности и всички сценични танци на народите, стъпили върху академичните принципи и изисквания на балетния и танцов спектакъл : унгарски, руско-цигански, полски, испански, модерни, интерпретации на български фолклор, източен фолклор, гръцки танци, марокански танци и т.н . Костюмирането, музиката и танцовите движения в хореографията, трябва да съответстват на характера на съответната националност.

Позволява се:
Използването на реквизит съответстващ на характера на съответната националност.

Не е позволено:
използването на запалени огнъове, режещи, чупещи се и опасни за живота предмети на сцената. Един и същ костюм не може да бъде използван за два различни танца.

Акробатични движения са позволени , но само ако влизат в характеристиката на съответния национален танц. При не добро техническо изпълнение на акробатичните елементи се намаляват точки.

Подръжки не се позволяват във възрастова категория деца до 11 години! Под подръжка се разбира изпълнение на фигура, при която танцьора е вдигнат от друг/и и краката му са във въздуха.

Подръжки са позволени само ако влизат в характеристиката на съответния национален танц ( без възраст деца до 11год) При не добро техническо изпълнение се намаляват точки. 
Забележка: НЕ СЕ ДОПУСКА участие на BELLY DANCE и ЛАТИНО ШОУ.

Времетраенето на танците е препоръчително !
• Соло – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин.
• Дует / двойка – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин.
• Малка група – от 2:30 до 3:00 мин.
• Формация – от 2:30 до 4:00 мин.
времетраене в състезателна категория формация във възрастови категории деца до 8 г. и от 9 до 11 г. е с продължителност 2:30- 3:00 мин. 

Времето се измерва
Oт първоначалната поза или влизане на изпълнителите на сцената до последната поза или излизане.

Съдийски системи за оценяване:
Система кръстче, 3Д система. Всички финали са по Скейтинг система.

ЕТНО ШОУ

Характеристики и движения:
Включени са всички сценични танци на народите: унгарски, руско-цигански, полски, испански, интерпретации на български фолклор, източен фолклор, гръцки танци, марокански танци и т.н. Костюмирането, музиката и танцовите движения в хореографията, трябва да съответстват на характера на образа. Позволява се ползването на реквизит. Реквизитът е позволен само ако може да бъде внесен и изнесен от изпълнителите с едно влизане в танцовата площ.

Забележка:
НЕ СЕ ДОПУСКА участие на BELLY DANCE и ЛАТИНО ШОУ. Етно шоу позволява използването на подръжки (с изключение на детската възрастова група), (под подръжка се разбира изпълнение на фигура, при която танцьора е вдигнат от друг танцьор и краката му са във въздуха). акробатика, и други театрални ефекти. Не е позволено използването на запалени огнъове, режещи, чупещи се и опасни за живота предмети на сцената(предмети, замърсяващи танцувалната площ). Един и същ костюм не може да бъде използван за два различни танца. Подръжките са забранени във възрастова категория деца до 11 години.
Едно представяне в стил Етно шоу винаги трябва да има насока, сюжет и доловима концепция за забавление на публиката.

Времетраенето на танците е препоръчително !
• Соло – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин. 
• Дует / двойка – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин. 
• Малка група – от 2:30 до 3:00 мин. 
• Формация – от 2:30 до 4:00 мин. 
времетраене в състезателна категория формация във възрастови категории деца до 8 г. и от 9 до 11 г. е с продължителност 2:30- 3:00 мин.

Съдийски системи за оценяване:
система кръстче, 4Д система.

ЛАТИНО ШОУ

Характеристика и движения: 
Когато говорим за латино музика в танцови стилове като румба и самба, НЕ очакваме латиноамерикански танцови стилове или движения, а автентична румба, автентична самба, карнавална самба и др. Изискват се някои от многобройните оригинални танцови стилове, а НЕ 5-те IDSF латиноамерикански танци. Представянията са в латино стил на всякаква латино музика като салса, бачата, меренге, сон или друга музика, инспирирана от латиното по избор на състезателите. Костюмите могат да бъдат карнавални, африкански, футуристични, улични, карибски или каквато и да е комбинация от всички тези стилове или други стилове, подходящи за изпълнявания танц / танци. Представянето може да е в каквато и да е форма, или комбинация от два или повече различни стилове, може да се включат театрални движения. Представянето и облеклото не трябва да напомнят тези, които се използват в IDSF състезания по латиноамерикански танци.

Оценяване:
Музикалност, разнообразие на танци и фигури, оригиналност, общо представяне и индивидуална хореография са елементите, които се оценяват. Много важно е да се представи хармония на идея, музика, танц, хореография, костюми и реквизит, защото цялостният образ се оценява в отборните изпълнения латино шоу.

Акробатични движения:
Разрешени

Лифтове:
НЕ са разрешени в детската категория, но са разрешени в останалите категории.

Сценичен реквизит:
разрешен, ако танцьорите могат да го внесат на сцената наведнъж.

СОЛО МЪЖЕ/ СОЛО ЖЕНИ 
Времетраене на представянето: 1 минута & 45 секунди минимум до 2 минути & 15 секунди максимум . 
Брой танцьори: 1

ДУО/ ДВОЙКИ 
Времетраене на представянето: 1 минута & 45 секунди минимум до 2 минути & 15 секунди максимум. 
Брой танцьори: 2

МАЛКИ ГРУПИ 
Времетраене на представянето: 2 минути & 30 секунди минимум до 3 минути максимум 2. 
Брой танцьори: 3 – 7

ФОРМАЦИИ 
Времетраене на представянето: 2 минути & 30 секунди минимум до 4 минути максимум. 2. 
Брой танцьори: 8 – 24
Съдийски системи за оценяване:
Система кръстче, 4Д система.

АКРО ДЖИМ

Характеристики и движения:
Акробатичният танц трябва да включва много техники, напр. акробатика, баланс, извиване на тялото. Въздушни номера без ръце, контролирани движения, както и акробатични елементи, статични елементи, скокове, поддръжки с ръце, обръщания, кълба, салта, като всички те трябва да са свързани с танцови движения и танцови комбинации. Набляга се на силата, разтягането, контрола и лекотата при изпълнението, без значение каква техника се използва. 
Не се разрешава да се поставя танц във основа на аеробика или на елементи от спортен рокендрол.

От гледна точка на безопасността е забранено:
• Да се изпълняват поддръжки / лифтове на по-високо ниво от ръста на танцьора, както и различни изхвърляния от ръце на другия танцьор; 
• Да се пада на колене, стомах или гръб от скок ; 
• Да се започва акробатично премятане от фаза на летеж; 
• Да се изпълнява какъвто и да било акробатичен елемент повече от три пъти (разрешени са вариации, например изпълнение на различни форми на даден елемент). Например: колело, колело с една ръка, колело с преход на земята, колело на лакът и т.н.)

Лифтове, пирамиди, изхвърляния:
• Лифтовете са разрешени при възрастовите групи на младежи и възрастни.
• Пирамидите са разрешени при възрастовите групи на младежи и възрастни. Пирамидата е елемент от артистичната, силовата и пластичната акробатика. Тя представлява групова позиция, при която танцьорите, поддържайки се един друг, оформят сложна фигура. По време на изпълнениетио на пирамида, въпросната фигура трябва да остане фиксирана за период от 3 до 5 секунди.
• При възрастовата група младежи са забранени високите пирамиди без странична помощ.
• При възрастовите групи деца и младежи са забранени различни изхвърляния на един танцьор от друг.

Облекло и декоративни елементи:
Правилата за костюмите са в Общия правилник на IDO. 
• От гледна точка на безопасността е забранено да се носят декоративни елементи като обици, пиърсинг на носа, на езика, на пъпа, по кожата на лицето. Забранени са също така очила, слушалки, всякакви декорации от прозрачна пластмаса, гривни, гердани и игли. Всички украшения трябва да се свалят. 
(Изключения: украсата върху роклите и временните татуировки). Всички аксесоари, например аксесоарите за коса, трябва да са пристегнати здраво и , ако е възможно, да са меки и плоски. Дългата коса трябва да е вързана и да не закрива лицето.

Сценичен реквизит:
Разрешен е според Общите предписания за Перформинг артс.

Оценяване:
Високо се оценяват музикалността, разнообразието от акробатични елементи и танцът сам по себе си, оригиналността на композицията, както и хармонията между концепция, музика, хореография и акробатични елементи.

MTV ТАНЦИ

Характеристики:
Смесица на различни танцови стилове в нови креативни хореографии инспирирани от традициятa на MTV. Всичките техники са позволени.

Музика:
Всяка група сама подбира музиката, на която ще танцува. Всички видове музикален ритъм са допустими и танцъорите могат да се състезават в състезания по MTV- дeнс.

Времетраене на представянето:
2:30 – 3:00 минути за малки групи и 3:00 – 4:00 минути за формации

Темпо:
без ограничения

Характеристика и движения:
Позволява се изпозването на движения на канон и работа в партер . Движенията могат да бъдат и леко подчертаващи женствеността и кокетността на изпълнителките – за пример Бурлеска шоу. В MTV стила (музикални клипове) се използва и добре премерената акробатика. Допуска се сценичен реквизит.Насърчава се разнообразната композиция в хореографията (престрояване, разминаване и други различни танцови фигури.) Всички танцови техники са позволени.

Лифтове / подръжки: 
са разрешени (с изключение във възрастови категории деца)

Съдийски системи за оценяване:
Система кръстче, 3Д система.

МАЖОРЕТНИ ТАНЦИ

ПАРАДНИ ,ТАНЦОВИ И СПОРТНИ 
След проявен конкретен интерес към стила, ще се изпраща регламент за участие.

МОДЕРЕН И СЪВРЕМЕНЕН ТАНЦ

Модерeн еартистична форма на танц с много стилове, която се е развила за относително дълъг период от време. Модерн е по-свободен, неограничен стил танц, в който хореографът използва емоциите и настроенията, за да формира собствени стъпки, за разлика от балета, в който има строго определен брой и вид стъпки. Тук имаме съзнателно използване на гравитацията, докато балетът се стреми да бъде лек и фееричен.

Важно е да използваме съвременните техники в модерн денс, които могат да се връщат към техниката на основателите на модерния танц, но можем да използваме и напълно нови, експериментални и оригинални идеи за модерн денс.

Съвременният танц дава нова информация за тялото и работата му, предлага ново качество на движенията, нови форми на тялото, предоставя възможност за нов процес на композиция и място за експерименти.

СОЛО МЪЖЕ, СОЛО ЖЕНИ, МАЛКА ГРУПА, ФОРМАЦИЯ 
Характеристика и движения:
Прилагат се същите правила, като при класическия балет, но с използване на модерна техника. Модeрн данс (Modern Dance) възникна като противопоставяне срещу класическата техника. Следователно тук се насърчават оригиналната техника и хореография.

Сценичен реквизит:разрешен.

Акробатични движения:разрешени.

Времетраене:
• Соло – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин. 
• Дует / двойка – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин. 
• Малка група – от 2:30 до 3:00 мин. 
• Формация – от 2:30 до 4:00 мин. 
Времетраене в състезателна категория формация във възрастови категории деца до 7 г. и от 8 до 11 г. е с продължителност 2:30- 3:00 мин.

Времето се измерва от първоначалната поза или влизане на изпълнителите на сцената до последната поза или излизане.

ВАЖНО: При нарушение на правилата за времетраенето на танца и възрастовите ограничения групата се дисквалифицира.

ДЖАЗ ТАНЦ

Съвременен джаз танц:
Тази дисциплина може да бъде танцувана с различни стилове и темпо, използвайки теми, базирани на афро-кубинкси, ориенталски, испански или други национални теми. Може да бъде представена като герой, например каубой, моряк, клоун и др. Може да бъде и абстрактна по характер. Лиричен джаз, изпълнен на музика като наппример Wind Beneath My Wings на Bette Midler, може да бъде включен в джаз данс дисциплината, както и в модерн данс.

Забележка:
Модерният балет не трябва да се смесва с джаз данс и не трябва да се състезава в тази дисциплина. Други съвременни стилове като хип-хоп, диско, Брейк данс, и Електрик буги могат да бъдат включени, но не трябва да доминират / контролират изпълненията джаз денс.

Характеристики и движения:
Джаз танца е многолика арт-форма. Гореописаните типове на джаз танца са примери за това какво се позволява в тази категория.

Съдържание:
Цялата програма трябва да се състои от джаз изпълнение. джаз техника, завъртания, скокове, разтягания, а също използване на port de bras, крака и горна част на тялото. Вместването във времето и ритъма също се оценяват. Състезателите трябва да са с подходящи обувки.

Акробатичните движения:
От началото на януари 2009 година акробатичните движения не се разрешават в джаз танца , с изключение на партерни акробатични претъркаляния, изпълнени в кантакт със танцовата повърхност.

Поддръжки:
В детска възрастова група са забранени – до 11 год.Разрешени при юноши и младежи

Сценичен реквизит:
От 1януари 2010 ръчният, сценичният реквизит и декорите ще се използват според следните условия:

• Облекло: Всички аксесоари към костюмите, като например шапки, шалове, ръкавици, колани и др, могат да се използват, ако представляват интегрална част от костюма. Те могат да се свалят, разменят, хвърлят, но не могат да се оставят да замърсяват сцената. Това означава, че танцьорът не може да напусне сцената след изпълнението си и да ги остави там. Ако даден танцьор хвърли или изпусне шал на сцената, трябва да го вдигне и отнесе, когато напуска. 
• Ръчен реквизит: Всякакъв ръчен реквизит, като бастуни, чадъри, ръчни чанти, куфари, огледала, знамена и др, могат да се използват, ако представляват интегрална част от представянето и ако се използват по време на изпълнението. Може да се оставят за земята, ако това е част от изпълнението и да се взимат при напускане на сцената.Ръчният реквизит не може да се използва като декор. Или с други думи: танцьорът не може да излезе на сцената, носейки чадър, да го остави на земята, да изтанцува танца си без да използва чадъра и в края на представянето си да го вдигне и да напусне сцената. 
• Сценичен реквизит: Необходимият сценичен реквизит, като столове, табуретки, кутии, стълби и др. Трябва да се внесат от танцьора наведнъж, трябва да представляват интегрална част от представянето и да се използват по време на изпълнението. Не се разрешават предмети, които мебелират или украсяват сцената. В края на изпълнението си танцьорът трябва да отнесе реквизита извън сцената. 
• Театрален или сценичен реквизит: Всички сценични декори, завеси, дървета и подобни, служещи за създаване на пейзаж или украсяване на сцената, са забранени.

Времетраене :
• Соло – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин.
• Дует / двойка – от 1:45 до 2:15 мин.
• Малка група – от 2:30 до 3:00 мин.
• Формация – от 2:30 до 4:00 мин.
Времетраене в състезателна категория формация във възрастови категории деца до 7 г. и от 8 до 11 г. е с продължителност 2:30- 3:00 мин.
Времето се измерва от първоначалната поза или влизане на изпълнителите на сцената до последната поза или излизане.

Формации:
Времетраене на представянето: 2 минути & 30 секунди минимум до 4 минути максимум. 2. 
Брой танцьори: 8 – 24

Важно:
При нарушение на правилата за времетраенето на танца и възрастовите ограничения групата се дисквалифицира.

КЛАСИЧЕСКИ ТАНЦИ

Характеристики и движения:
Оценява се класическата балетна техника и стил, представяне на оригинална хореография от класическото ни наследство или нова интерпретация върху познати откъси от балетни постановки, работа с реквизит. Mодерни и модерен джаз постановки не могат да се изпълняват в този стил.

Разрешени са:
Подръжки във възрастова категория деца до 11 години! Под подръжка се разбира изпълнение на фигура, при която танцьора е вдигнат от друг/и и краката му са във въздуха.

Забранено е:
От 2012 год. е забранено използване на палцова техника при деца до 11 год.

Времетраенето на танците е препоръчително!
• Соло – от 1 мин. минимум вариации до 2 мин. максимум
• Дует от 1:45 – 2:15 мин.
• Малка група от 2:30 – 3:00 мин.
• Формация – голяма група от 2:30 – 4:00 мин. . Формация в категория Деца ще е с продължителност от 2:30 минимално до 3:00 максимално.

Съдийски системи за оценяване:
система кръстче, 3Д система.

ХИП ХОП

Характеристики и движения:
Хип Хоп включва две основни направления: up work – пластичен и танцувално направление за работа с горната част на тялото и foot work – силово направление за работа с крака включващо типични въртеливи движения с фриз (замръзване).
Задължително в хореографията трябва да се използват и двете направления на стила. 
Хореографията трябва да бъде стилово издържана в хип хоп по всички показатели – композиционни / фигурални промени, скокови елементи, новости и оригиналност и търсени ефекти в изпълнението.
Ще бъдат оценявани – музикалност, разнообразие на движенията, цялостно изпълнение и индивидуална хореография. 
Високо се оценяват динамични, логически връзки в постановката и ритмичната интерпретация – синкопи.
Хармонията на музиката, хореографията и костюмите трябва да подчертава спецификата на стила хип хоп.
Позволена е смяна на акцента.

Темпо:
108 – 112 удара в мин. Музиката трябва да е типичен хип хоп.
Сценичен реквизит не можещ да са определи като облекло, не може да се използва. Шапки, палта, пуловери, шалове и пр., могат да се използват, но чадъри, пръчки и други подобни предмети, които не влизат в облеклото, не могат да са използват. Допустимият сценичен реквизит трябва да бъде държан в продължение на цялото изпълнение.

Забранено е:
падането или хвърлянето на каквито и да било предмети и дрехи на пода.

ВАЖНО!: При нарушение на правилата за времетраенето на танца и възрастовите ограничения, колектива се дисквалифицира.

СОЛО, ДВОЙКА

• Характеристики и движения Bключват се различни приплъзвания, въртеливи движения характерни за стила, стопове, скокливи движения и др. Движения от електрик буги могат да бъдат използвани, но да не доминират. Хип Хоп се танцува във фраза от осем удара.

• Акробатични движения са позволени, включително тези които са типични за брейка, но не трябва да преобладават в изпълнението. При не добро техническо изпълнение на акробатичните елементи се намаляват точки.

• Поддръжки не са позволени. Под подръжка се разбира изпълнение на фигура, при която танцьора е вдигнат от друг/и и краката му са във въздуха. / Поддръжки са позволени само при формациите /

• Специални забележки за дуети: Двамата танцьори трябва да танцуват едновременно, а не самостоятелно или един по един. Тяхното изпълнение трябва да включва синхронизирани стъпки, като “следвай водача”, “сянка”, “огледало”, така също и танцуване в синхрон.

• Забранява се: Bсякакъв физически контакт между опонентите преди, след и по време на изпълненията.

• Забранява се: Демонстрация на агресия.

ПРАВИЛА ЗА ПРОВЕЖДАНЕ НА СЪСТЕЗАНИЕТО:

СОЛО И ДУЕТ/ДВОЙКА
Всеки един от кръговете се състои от следните три тура:
• Първи тур – всяка група от състезатели започва с едноминутно изпълнение, танцувайки едновременно и заедно на музика на организаторите.
• Втори тур – състезателите танцуват поотделно, в продължение на една минута върху музика на организаторите, като всички остават на танцовата площадка. 
• Трети тур – повтаря се първи тур.

Времетраене:
• Продължителност на изпълнението – 1 мин. +/- 5сек.
• Състезанието се провежда на музика на организатора.
• Темпо – 108 – 112 удара в мин.

МАЛКИ ГРУПИ
• Всички горепосочени правила за характеристики и движения, акробатични движения, поддръжки, важат и тук.
• Групите ще бъдат оценявани като цяло – сола могат да се изпълняват, но не трябва да преобладават.

Правила за провеждане на състезанието при малки групи:
• Всяка група танцува поотделно.

Времетраене и темпо:
• Продължителност на изпълненията във всички кръгове е – 2 мин. +/- 5сек. 
• Състезанието се провежда на музика на организатора.
• Темпо – 108 – 112 удара в мин. 
• ВАЖНО! Само във възрастова група – Mini Kids се разрешава изпълнението на собствена музика.

ФОРМАЦИИ
• Всички горепосочени правила за характеристики и движения, акробатични движения, важат и тук.
• Формациите ще бъдат оценявани като цяло – сола могат да се изпълняват, но не трябва да преобладават.
• Поддръжки са позволени само при формациите, но са забранени за деца до 11 години.

Времетраене и темпо:
• Продължителност на изпълнението – 2:30мин. – 3:00 мин. на собствена музика.
• Темпо – 120 удара в мин.

Правила за провеждане на състезанието при формации:
• Всяка група танцува поотделно на собствена миксирана музика.

Съдийски системи за оценяване: 
• система кръстче, 3Д система

ТАНЦОВО ШОУ

Характеристики и движения:
Танцово шоу в широкия смисъл на думата се основава на танцовата техника на джаз, балет и / или модерн. Други танцови дисциплини също могат да бъдат включени, но не могат да доминират. Бални, латино и рокендрол (според класификацията на IDSF & WDC) се изключват и не могат да се изпълняват. Танцово Шоу позволява използването на подръжки (с изключение на детската възрастова група), (под подръжка се разбира изпълнение на фигура, при която танцьора е вдигнат от друг/и и краката му са във въздуха). акробатика, акробатични елементи от брейк, реквизит, буфосинхрон и други театрални ефекти. Всички тези стилове могат да бъдат представени в собствена интерпретация от хореографа (няма задължителни елементи). Реквизитът е позволен само ако може да бъде внесен и изнесен от изпълнителите с едно влизане в танцовата площ.
Не е позволено използването на запалени огнъове, режещи, чупещи се и опасни за живота предмети на сцената(предмети, замърсяващи танцувалната площ). Един и същ костюм не може да бъде използван за два различни танца. Забранен е рок-енд-ролът. Подръжките са забранени във възрастова категория деца до 11 години.br>Едно представяне в стил Танцово Шоу винаги трябва да има насока, сюжет и доловима концепция за забавление на публиката.

Времетраене на състезателните категории в танцово шоу:
• Соло от 1:45 – 2:15 мин.
• Дует/двойка от 1:45 – 2:15 мин.
• Малка група от 2:30 – 3:00 мин.
• Формация от 2:30 – 4:00 мин.Формация в категории Деца ще е с продължителност от 2:30 минимално до 3:00 максимално.
.

ВАЖНО: При нарушение на правилата за времетраенето на танца и възрастовите ограничения групата се дисквалифицира.

Съдийски системи за оценяване:  система кръстче, 4Д система. 

МИНИ ПРОДУКЦИИ

Продукция се определя като сложна театрална презентация, доминирана от танц, която може да включва всяка дисциплина на БСТФ или комбинация от дисциплини, която използва сюжет, тема или концепция. Тъй като основната й цел е да забавлява, тя е под юрисдикцията на Департамента на Сценичните Танци.

Брой на участниците: 
Мин.3 танцьори – макс. 12 танцьори.

Времетраене:
Мин. време за представяне – 3:00 минути – макс.време 08:00 минути.
Всички характеристики на големите продукции охарактезират и малките продукции.

ГОЛЕМИ ПРОДУКЦИИ

Допустими танцови форми: 
Тази категория е отворена за всякакви комбинации от танцови дисциплини, покровителствани от БСТФ. Танцови дисциплини под контрола на WDC, IDSF и WRRC не могат да участват в прояви на БСТФ освен със специално разрешение, дадено от официална организация, представяща дадената дисциплина.

Възрастово ограничение:
Няма възрастови ограничения и всички възрасти ще се състезават една срещу друга. Един танцьор може да се представи само в една продукция на едно мероприятие.

Времеви ограничения:
Минимално време за представяне е 5:00 минути, a максимумът е 08:00 минути

Сценичен реквизит и декор:
Състезателите разполагат с 5:00 минути да разположат и с 5:00 минути да демонтират сценичния декор или реквизит. Разполагането и демонтирането трябва да се осъществява от сценични работници, осигурени от клуба, школата или групата, представяща продукцията. Течности и други субстанции, които могат да замърсят, повредят или да направят танцовата сцена / настилка опасна за танцьора, е забранено да се използват. Огън и функциониращи оръжия също не са разрешени.

Брой на състезателите:
Минимум 25 танцьори, без ограничения в максимума, са разрешени в тази категория. Но от хореографа на продукцията зависи да се увери, че сцената е достатъчно голяма да побере всички танцьори.

Такси:
Всеки участник в продукция, включително танцьори, певци, музиканти, изпълнители на поддържащи роли, трябва да заплатят стартова такса според Правилника на БСТФ.

Представяне:
Продукцията може да включва соло, дуо и ансамбъл изпълнители, но солото и дуото не трябва да доминират в представянето. Позволени са поддръжките и акробатични движения, ако не застрашават здравето на танцьорите. Поддръжките в детската група са забранени, а младежи и възрастни не трябва да вдигат деца.
Други театрални ефекти, като мъгла, лазерно осветление, фокуси и илюзии са допустими при условие, че не носят никакъв риск за изпълнителите, сценичните работници и публиката.

Музика:
Може да се използва всякакъв тип музика, при условие, че не е обидна за публиката или за БСТФ. Музика с неприличен или обиден текст не се разрешава. Може да се използва и жива музика, ако музикантите са част от представяната продукция.

ЖИВА МУЗИКА
1. Музикантите не се причисляват към участниците, ако не танцуват в програмата.
2. Организаторът трябва да бъде уведомен чрез email 4 седмици преди проявата. В email – а ТРЯБВА да са посочени всички необходими детайли.
3. Цялото оборудване трябва да се внесе и разположи от танцьорите и / или музикантите.
4. Разполагането трябва да се извърши тихо и ненатрапчиво.
5. Разполагането и демонтирането на реквизита трябва да отнеме не повече от 5 минути.
6. Живата музика и музиката на запис могат да бъдат смесвани. В подобен случай озвучителната система на организатора може да се използва, ако изпълнителите дават определен знак на тонрежисьора за пускане и спиране на музикалния запис.
Например: Ако в програмата се използва жива музика, може да има две системи.
a. Озвучителна система – за CD и / или два микрофона за вокалите.
b. Допълнителна подвижна система с вход за живата музика / вокалите.
c. И двете системи могат да се смесят – за жива музика и звукозапис
7. Предложения за музика на живо:
Вокали, брас секция, дървени духови, струнни, ударни и перкусия, бас, клавишни. Пиана в реален размер и органи са забранени.
Отговорност на школите, клубовете и групите е да си осигурят всички специални ефекти, както и сценични работници за бърза и безопасна работа. Също така тяхната отговорност е да се консултират с организатора и да се уверят, че специалните ефекти са разрешени за публиката и за мястото на провеждане на проявата.

Съдийски системи за оценяване: Система кръстче, 4Д система, скейтинг система

ХИП ХОП - БИТКИ

Характеристики и движения:
Хип Хоп включва две основни направления: up work – пластичен и танцувално направление за работа с горната част на тялото и foot work – силово направление за работа с крака включващо типични въртеливи движения с фриз (замръзване).
Задължително в хореографията трябва да се използват и двете направления на стила. 
Хореографията трябва да бъде стилово издържана в хип хоп по всички показатели – композиционни / фигурални промени, скокови елементи, новости и оригиналност и търсени ефекти в изпълнението.
Ще бъдат оценявани – музикалност, разнообразие на движенията, цялостно изпълнение и индивидуална хореография. 
Високо се оценяват динамични, логически връзки в постановката и ритмичната интерпретация – синкопи.
Хармонията на музиката, хореографията и костюмите трябва да подчертава спецификата на стила хип хоп.
Позволена е смяна на акцента.

Темпо:
108 – 112 удара в мин. Музиката трябва да е типичен хип хоп.
Сценичен реквизит не можещ да са определи като облекло, не може да се използва. Шапки, палта, пуловери, шалове и пр., могат да се използват, но чадъри, пръчки и други подобни предмети, които не влизат в облеклото, не могат да са използват. Допустимият сценичен реквизит трябва да бъде държан в продължение на цялото изпълнение.

Забранено е:
падането или хвърлянето на каквито и да било предмети и дрехи на пода.

ВАЖНО!: При нарушение на правилата за времетраенето на танца и възрастовите ограничения, колектива се дисквалифицира.

СОЛО, ДВОЙКА

• Характеристики и движения Bключват се различни приплъзвания, въртеливи движения характерни за стила, стопове, скокливи движения и др. Движения от електрик буги могат да бъдат използвани, но да не доминират. Хип Хоп се танцува във фраза от осем удара.

• Акробатични движения са позволени, включително тези които са типични за брейка, но не трябва да преобладават в изпълнението. При не добро техническо изпълнение на акробатичните елементи се намаляват точки.

• Поддръжки не са позволени. Под подръжка се разбира изпълнение на фигура, при която танцьора е вдигнат от друг/и и краката му са във въздуха. / Поддръжки са позволени само при формациите /

• Специални забележки за дуети: Двамата танцьори трябва да танцуват едновременно, а не самостоятелно или един по един. Тяхното изпълнение трябва да включва синхронизирани стъпки, като “следвай водача”, “сянка”, “огледало”, така също и танцуване в синхрон.

• Забранява се: Bсякакъв физически контакт между опонентите преди, след и по време на изпълненията.

• Забранява се: Демонстрация на агресия.

ПРАВИЛА ЗА ПРОВЕЖДАНЕ НА СЪСТЕЗАНИЕТО:

СОЛО И ДУЕТ/ДВОЙКА
Всеки един от кръговете се състои от следните три тура:
• Първи тур – всяка група от състезатели започва с едноминутно изпълнение, танцувайки едновременно и заедно на музика на организаторите.
• Втори тур – състезателите танцуват поотделно, в продължение на една минута върху музика на организаторите, като всички остават на танцовата площадка. 
• Трети тур – повтаря се първи тур.

Времетраене:
• Продължителност на изпълнението – 1 мин. +/- 5сек.
• Състезанието се провежда на музика на организатора.
• Темпо – 108 – 112 удара в мин.

МАЛКИ ГРУПИ
• Всички горепосочени правила за характеристики и движения, акробатични движения, поддръжки, важат и тук.
• Групите ще бъдат оценявани като цяло – сола могат да се изпълняват, но не трябва да преобладават.

Правила за провеждане на състезанието при малки групи:
• Всяка група танцува поотделно.

Времетраене и темпо:
• Продължителност на изпълненията във всички кръгове е – 2 мин. +/- 5сек. 
• Състезанието се провежда на музика на организатора.
• Темпо – 108 – 112 удара в мин. 
• ВАЖНО! Само във възрастова група – Mini Kids се разрешава изпълнението на собствена музика.

ФОРМАЦИИ
• Всички горепосочени правила за характеристики и движения, акробатични движения, важат и тук.
• Формациите ще бъдат оценявани като цяло – сола могат да се изпълняват, но не трябва да преобладават.
• Поддръжки са позволени само при формациите, но са забранени за деца до 11 години.

Времетраене и темпо:
• Продължителност на изпълнението – 2:30мин. – 3:00 мин. на собствена музика.
• Темпо – 120 удара в мин.

Правила за провеждане на състезанието при формации:
• Всяка група танцува поотделно на собствена миксирана музика.

Съдийски системи за оценяване: 
• система кръстче, 3Д система

акробатични танци

The categories of Acrobatic/ Gymnastic Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Characteristics and Movement: Acrobatic dance shall include many techniques, such as tumbling, balancing, contortions, and aerial tricks without hands and controlled movement, as well as acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand support elements, turns, rolls, walkovers and saltos, all of which should be connected with dance movement and dance combinations. The emphasis is on strength, stretch, control and ease of movement, no matter what technique is being used. It is forbidden to form routine on the basic Aerobic and sport Rock’ n ’Roll ­elements. For safety reasons it is forbidden in all age divisions: · To perform supports/lifts higher than dancers’ height as well as different throws from hands of other dancer except in the adult division. · To fall on the knees, stomach and back from the jumping position; · To begin an acrobatic walkover within flight phase; – To perform any acrobatic element more than three times (variations are allowed i.e. performance of different forms of the element. For example: cartwheel, one hand cartwheel, cartwheel with transition to the floor, elbow cartwheel etc.). · To perform headstand (head balance).

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

СТЕП ТАНЦИ

The categories of Tap Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Trio, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Although the primary emphasis should be on the harmonious blend of the dancer’s footwork (sound), many variables exist. All forms of tap will compete against each other, such as: Rhythm, Hoofing, Buck and Wing, Waltz Clog, Military, Precision Kick Line, Latin and Musical Theater. 2. Jingle taps, double taps or double claques are not permitted.
  2. The music must not contain prerecorded taps.
  3. Personal amplification devices are not permitted.
  4. No more than 30 seconds of a cappella or tacet (silence) may be used in any one routine. The absence of music must occur within the music and not at the beginning or end. “Stop Time” is an open part of a measure of music, not played but silent, with some notes being played. “A Capella” is an open phrase of multiple measures in length, but completely absent (silent) of any/all music.

NOTE: Music must be played at the beginning and end of the music and the A Capella must be no longer than 30 seconds. A Capella can also be defined as “Tacit.”

  1. The dancer’s taps and the music must be clearly audible to the audience and adjudicators. NOTE: The Organizer must make sure the stage has adequate floor microphones and speakers to make this possible.
  2. Acrobatic Movements that are an integral part of the routine are permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts, but will not enhance the dancer’s score. (see in General Rules restriction for Children, p.42)
  3. Regarding health and safety issues in Tap dance, it is not allowed to dance or perform toe work (dancing on pointe) in the Children’s age division for longer than one beat of music. The definition of this being dancing or standing on the tips of the toes in weight-bearing steps on one or both feet. Toe work/dancing on pointe will be for no longer than one beat of the music on one or both feet in Children’s Division. NOTE: No more than one beat and NO weight bearing pointe work at any time. This is stated strictly to clarify the rule already in effect

LIVE MUSIC during Junior and Adult Groups:

  1. This is a separate category and cannot be mixed with other categories.
  2. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine. The ages of the musicians are not relevant unless they are also dancers.
  3. The Organizer must be advised by email 4 weeks prior to the event. The email must explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  4. All equipment must be brought in and set up by the Dancers and/or musicians.
  5. Set up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  6. The set up and break down of the musical equipment and portable amplification must not take more than 3 minutes.
  7. Live music and recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music. For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems: a. House system for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only. b. The entrant may supply additional portable amplification system for live music/vocals. c. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music 8. Suggested live music: Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums, percussion, bass and keyboards may be used to make music. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

Боливуд

The categories of Bollywood are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Although Bollywood dance has its origins in Traditional Indian dance, it is made up of many differing dance styles including Indian Classical, Bhangra, Arabic, Folk, Tribal, Latino, Hip Hop, Street Dance, “Michael Jackson”, and many others.

We must, however, remember that in Bollywood there must be a contrast of dance styles and movement, depending on the music. It is important to use Lip Sync and Mime, to encourage enactment of some of the lyrics. This discipline must apply technique, grace, speed, style, versatility, body isolation, spatial awareness, energy, facial expression and emotion, whether solo, towards a partner or within a group. Many Bollywood dancers are also actors, so this skill needs to be shown.

MOVEMENT: We would expect to see much Indian dance influence, including Hand Gestures, Postures, Head Slides, Classical moves in arms, legs, feet, knee squats, etc., even within very Modern pieces.

COSTUME: This can be from Classical Indian (with or without ghunghroos/ankle bells) to a “Hoodie Look” to Futuristic, and even a mix, as long as it is in keeping with the dance style, music, Production piece, but still remain tasteful, and respect age.

FACIAL EXPRESSION: This is a very important part of Bollywood, so all parts of the face need to be worked. Eyes especially play an important part. Within this section we would expect to see Lip Sync, as well as many different emotions.

MAKE UP: Must be in keeping at all times, and must respect age. LIFTS & ACROBATICS: These may be included, again, as long as they are in keeping (although not expected). Lifts are not permitted for Children and Mini Kids. AGE: In Productions can be mix of all age divisions. PROPS & SCENERY: All exactly as Performing Arts. However, hand props such as a hand mirror, flowers, jewellery, etc., can play an important role in a performance.

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

CHARACTER / FOLK DANCE SHOW/ ETHNIC

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Character Dance pertains to dances portraying characters from traditional Ballets, Opera, Broadway style Musical Theatre, TV or Video. The range of characters is very broad and may include: The Wolf from Peter and the Wolf, Little Red Riding Hood, a Bird, Dog, Cat, Flower, Butterfly, Animal, Sailor, Nurse, Religious Preacher, Pauper, Prince or Shirley Temple. Costuming, music and dance movements must be appropriate to the character being presented.

Folk and Ethnic Dance: These disciplines must be Traditional Dances of any Nationality, passed down from generation to generation, and may include: Polonaise, Polynesian, American Indian, Highland Fling, Flamenco, Japanese Candle Dance, Hindu, Tarantella, African, etc. Traditional / authentic costuming and music is expected, and will be used in the total evaluation.

  1. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Ориентал Фолк

  1. Arabic folk dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Recommended Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Falaahii · Baladi Shaabi (used only for children vocals) · Muashahat · Bandari · Simsimiya (Bambuti) · Bedouin Not recommended for children Style: · Moroccan · Iraqi · Tunisian (because there are movements of after wedding ceremony) · Algerian · Iranian · Shamadan · Eskandarani · ritual dances and other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style For example: Sticks for Saidi… Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the organizer the dance style, they will perform.

    1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.

    4.1 Time Limits: ORIENTAL DANCE SOLO Preliminaries, 1/8, 1/16, etc. Organizer’s Music 1 minute all together – 1 minute improvisation in a group of 4-6 1 minute all together 10-12 ¼ and Semi-final own music 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, ORIENTAL SHOW DANCE (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATION Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes

    4.2 Length of Solo parts in categories: Note: In Duo, Group, Formation it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. 5. Rules for the Costume

    5.1 Oriental Dance Costume may consist of – Special integral dress – Long skirt and traditional or stylized top over a tricot – Pantaloons or leggins worn with a long skirt Children should be encouraged to dress like children and not like teens and adults. Dancers in the children’s division may never appear nude, so that cosume should be integral and must not distort body natural for this age. Limits: – Rather shallow neckline (not allowed deep decollete) – Covered shoulders (costume must have sleeves of any length) – Slit must not be higher than knee – All dancers in the children division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace, but NOT skin colored) Prohibited: – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but the same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves and to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Intimate parts of body (bust, buttock and pubic area) must be covered with cloth materials or must have a lining (not skin colored)

    5.2 Oriental Folk Costume must correspond to the chosen dance style. It must also correspond to general limits of children’s costume

    5.3 Oriental Show Costume can be of any type but it must correspond to general limits of children’s costumes Prohibited: – Costume materials that suggest sexual, deviate, sadomasochistic or other adult themes – Deep neckline – All dancers in the children’s division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace materials, but NOT skin colored) – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but he same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves ot to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Allowed: – Mini skirts and shorts if it is required by the image. In this case, the costume must fit in way to cover the intimate parts of the dancer´s body (buttock and pubic area) during all the performance – Light make-up, if it is required by the image

    1. Choreography and Image Children should appear as children and not as teens and adults. Their image, music and choreography should be appropriate to the children’s age division. Children’s costumes, hair and make-up must be age appropriate and not distort the age of the child. It is possible to use make-up in Oriental Show Dance discipline to bring out the features of the face or to portray a character. In other Oriental dance disciplines it is prohibited to use make-up.
    2. In the Children’s Age Division it is forbidden to: – use a parter in Oriental dance discipline, while it is allowed in Oriental Folk and Oriental Show disciplines, if it is required by the image – use sharp cutting devices (knives, swords, etc.), if they are not dummy – the extensively executed shimmy movement in standing and walking positions is allowed not more than 4 bars – Use make-up (except Oriental Show ,

Белли денс

  1. Belly Dance / Oriental Show Belly Dance / Oriental Show Folk Belly Dance / Oriental Folk The categories are: Solo Female, Solo Male (only in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show), Duo, Group (3-7 dancers), Formation (8-24 dancers) AGE DIVISIONS All listed Belly Dance disciplines are only for Junior and older age divisions. Seniors may compete in Adult 2 AGE DIVISION AGE RANGE (years of birth listed below are for competition year 2018) Junior 12 – 15 (born in 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006) Adult 1 Adult 2 16 and over (born in 2002, 2001, 2000, 1999, 1998, 1997, 1996, …) 31 and over (born in 1987 and before) Senior 50 and over (Belly Dance /Oriental) (born in 1968, 1967, 1966, …) Dance disciplines for BELLY DANCE: Improvising in drum solo and Raqs Sharqi with organizers music.

    3.1. BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: based on the classical style Raqs Sharqi and includes or may consist of elements of Oriental folk dances and styles, but they should not dominate. It is forbidden to use acrobatic movements or lifts, use props or accessories except of canes, finger cymbals, and “conventional veils”. Veils that have been made into “wings” by the use of rods are permitted if they are not the focus of the choreography and are used for dramatic effect at the beginning or end of the piece. Musical accompaniment for BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: classical instrumental work with possible accompaniment of vocals. Modern or pop versions of music may be used if the dance and image created conform to the aforementioned principles.

    3.2 Show BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL Show: choreography with compulsory show elements may incorporate any form of dance, however BELLY DANCE original technique predominates. It is allowed to use oriental props and appropriate accessories (two veils, Isis wings, saber, vases, knives, and etc.) and any type of costume. Lifts and acrobatics are allowed. Various dances, styles and fusions of fantasy styles like flamenco oriental, Tribal, oriental tango, gothic and others are welcome. There has to be a development of the plot (introduction, culmination, finale). Competitors in Show BELLY DANCE/Oriental Show should provide the Organizer the title of their show. Stage props and scenery may be used if the competitors themselves put the objects in place during a single visit to the stage and remove them without the help of non-performers. Musical accompaniment for SHOW BELLY DANCE can be any kind of music. Scenic props – limit to bring: 15 seconds solo/duo; 25 seconds group; 45 seconds formation.

     

    3.3 ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE: Oriental Folk Dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Alexandrian

    Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Shamadan · Falaahii · Bedouin · Moroccan · Tunisian · Algerian · Iranian And other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style e.g. an original Shamadan (it is not allowed to switch on the candles), sticks for Saidi, a pitcher for Tunisian. Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the Organizer the dance style they will perform.

    1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.
    2. Duration of the Performance page 55 BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SOLO Juniors, Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors Preliminaries 1/8, 1/16, etc ORGANIZER’S MUSIC 1 minute (Improvising in Drum solo together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Drum solo by group of dancers 4 to 6, 1 minute (Raqs Sharqi together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Raqs Sharqi solo by group of dancers 4 to 6 ¼ and ½ Final, competitors own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes DUOS All rounds 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:30 – 4:00 minutes

    ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, SHOW BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SHOW (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Juniors Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Juniors, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATION All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 3:00 – 4:00 minutes

    Note: In Duo, Group, Formation, it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. Re-dance is possible in following: Re-dance live with compulsory music, paper re-dance and re-dance for the 1st place in the final round (only for competitors in tie for the 1st place). 6. Rules for Costumes

    6.1 Change of Costumes and Choreography BELLY DANCE/Oriental Solo Juniors, Seniors: costume may be changed for each round but it is not mandatory. Adult 1 and Adults 2 – ¼ final and ½ final can be the same choreography. Final has to be a new choreography and costume. The dancer’s choreography and image must coincide with the age division in which they are competing. All dancers have to stay on the floor during the whole performance. NOTE: In Oriental Show and Oriental Folk disciplines, in all the rounds a dancer must perform the same choreography

    6.2 Costume Limits: – Costume must cover all the intimate parts of a dancer during all the performance. The intimate parts are: bust, buttock,pubic area – Intimate parts must be covered with cloth materials of any color (except skin color and tan materials). In case of using lace materials, the costume must have a not see-through lining – In case of using skin colored materials to cover intimate parts, the costume must not imply nudity. So, these parts must be decorated with lace, strass etc. – The costume must fit in way to cover intimate parts of dancer during all the performance. – It is recommended that all male dancers wear a men´s dance belt underneath their costume. A costume consisting only of a men´s dance belt is prohibited. Male dancers are allowed to perform bare-chested

    6.2.1 Belly Dance / Oriental Possible to use integral dress or special bra with a skirt (with or without belt) Upper Body – Forbidden to use open bra – The distance between the bra cups should not be more than 5 cm

    Lower Body – Lower part of costume should be a skirt (slit skirt or simple skirt) – Fitting the lower part of the costume should ensure the cover of the vertical line of the buttocks. – Buttocks and Pubic area must be covered with cloth material – In case of the lower part of the costume (skirt) made with see-through or lace materials, the intimate parts must be covered with special panties. – The panties should cover the entire buttock in the back. In the front, the panty line should follow the line between the body and the flexed leg. The distance from the hip line to the panty line should be at least 5 centimetres (2 inches) when measure from the side (pants must cover buttocks and pubic area). – Abbreviated bikini bottoms, thongs, thong appliqués and any shorts imitating a thong look are prohibited. The dancers should make sure their costumes fit properly, as ill-fitting shorts or panties can wedge or otherwise expose the buttock in a way that is prohibited. – The panties must have the same color as the costume. Panties made with skin colored, lace or net materials are forbidden. – A dance costume should not be associated with a beach suit and/or underwear. – In case of a slit skirt, the slit should start not higher than at a distance of 10 cm from the iliac bones.

    6.2.2 Oriental Folk The costume should completely correspond to the chosen style. When choosing a costume design, one should follow the general restrictions on costumes (item 6.2). The folk costume should not look open, therefore these elements are not recommended: – High slits (above the middle of the hip) – See-through or lace materials (in case of its use, a costume must have a not see-through lining)

    6.2.3 Oriental Show costume can be of any type, but it must comply with the general rules of costumes, including all the restrictions (item 6.2)

    6.2.4 Age Restrictions: Costumes and Image Juniors: Juniors should always be dressed age-appropriately and their image should be that of a junior and not that of an adult. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: “adult” costumes; high slits; see-through or skin colored materials. Adults: Adult dancers should bear in mind that they are the ones setting the trend for the younger dancers, who look up to them and seek inspiration from them. This is why it is very important to be dressed in a good taste. Seniors: When choosing a costume for Seniors, should be considered the physiological characteristics, as well as the moral component of the image of dancers of “elegant” age. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: high slits; see -through or net materials.

    1. Dancer’s Number

    7.1 For dancers in the show and folk categories it is not necessary to affix their assigned number to their costume.

    7.2 For all quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in all categories it is not necessary to affix the competitor’s assigned number to their costume.

    7.3 Master of Ceremonies is required to: in quarter-final, semi-final and final competition announce the competitor’s number and full name. For quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in Belly Dance/Oriental Solos, Duos, Groups and Formations – the name of the ensemble or pseudonym (stage name) is sufficient, as it is in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show Dance. 8. Competitors During their Performance 8.1 In Duo, Group, Formation categories all dancers have to stay on the dance floor during the whole performance from the beginning of composition until the end. 9. All dancers have to be ready to dance 30 minutes before their start time and they must give their music to the sound engineer at least 60 minutes prior to the start time. 10. Safety 10.1 It is forbidden to use an open flame, liquids or other substances that may leave the floor wet, damage the stage surface or make it unsafe.

    10.2. It is forbidden to use live animals.

    1. Notes for the Organizers When organizing a BELLY DANCE event it is necessary to:

    11.1 Ensure that the dance surface is kept clean.

    11.2 It is the Organizer’s responsibility to ensure that during the preliminaries for the Adult categories the compulsory music is changed for each heat so that all competitors have equal opportunity for improvising.

    11.3 After the semi-final results have been announced for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 a break of at least 15 minutes should be provided so the finalists may change their costumes and music be prepared for the final.

    11.4 Provide videotaping of the semi-final and final rounds for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 category in order to check that the rules have been followed with regard to the mandatory change of costume and choreography. 1

Фламенко

The categories in Flamenco are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

  1. SOLO PERFORMERS
  2. Solo performers represent one dance on a competition.
  3. Duration of dance up to 3 minutes
  4. The dance can be both in “puro” style, and in a modern direction of flamenco – “fusion”.
  5. Use of additional subjects is allowed.
  6. Participation in dance of supernumeraries or dancers of the second plan is forbidden.

Costumes:

  1. Performers dance in any flamenco dress.
  2. Dance may be performed in trousers if that is demanded by staging. 3. Additional accessories are allowed.
  3. DUOS Duo will be danced by female/female, male/female or male/male – The first round will be organizer’s music to Sevillanas for 1 to 1:15 minutes. The duo can choose one of the 4 parts of the Sevillanas. – The second round for those who have passed to the next round then do a performance to music of their own choice, which can be no longer than 3:30 and no less than 2:30. DUO Costume Regulations 1. First Round – Costumes should be identical for both dancers (an identical style, color, quantity of frill- son a skirt, etc.) – Additional accessories are allowed.
  4. Second Round – Costumes of dancers can be either in identical style, or differ in details. For example, an identical style of top, different skirts, different breed of a dress. – Absolutely different dresses are forbidden. – Dresses should be one style. – Accessories are allowed.
  5. GROUPS The group consist of 3 to 7 competitors. Competitors can present any dance, in any direction of flamenco – “puro”, “fusion”. The time limits: The first round can be no less than 2:30 and not longer than 3:30. In the final round the time limit is raised to 4:30 with a minimum of 2:30. Sevillianas may be used in Small Group.
  6. FORMATION Formations consist of 8 to 24 competitors The dance-group represents one number in any direction of flamenco, with additional subjects, or without them. The same rules will apply as for Group, but the final round will be increased to 5:00. In the Children’s division the limit will be 3:00 minimum and 4:00 maximum.
  7. Group and Formation Costume Regulations · Dresses should be presented in one style. · Distinctions in details of a dress are possible. · Additional accessories are allowed. · Use of man’s suits, at presentation of dance by girls, is allowed. The costume must fit the type of dance they are doing. Hand props may be used such as castanets, fans, Bolero hats and canes. Characteristic: The majority of the dance must be traditional Flamenco to Flamenco music. Deviations from the above must be minor.

Брейк Танц

The categories of Break Dance are: Solo and Crews. Starting January 1st, 2018 the categories of Break Dance are: Solo Female, Solo Male (B-Boys and B-Girls) and Crews (ADM 2017, Implementation 1.1.2018, no change possible before 2021) Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines. Break Dance is for Juniors and Adults only SOLO 1. Music: Organizer’s music in Break Dance style.

  1. Duration of Performance: Preliminary round: 2 minutes divided into three sections of 40 seconds duration each. Additional opening minute of the 1st round is not evaluated. In the preliminary round, there must be no more than three (3) competitors dancing together. The Chairperson of Adjudicators determines the number of competitors in the opening minute and final 40 seconds in the preliminary round. The best 16 competitors fight in “battles” one by one in a “knock-out-system” (5 – 10 minutes each battle).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Typical Break Dance Elements: Crown, Headspin, Backspin, Turtle, Helicopter, Windmill, Bailey Windmill, Uprock, Freeze, Sixstep, One Hand Up, Swipe, Atomic, Flair, Holoback, Traxx, 99, variable footwork, etc., including different variations of these figures, elements and movements. Keen ‘breaks’ (stopping of movement), isolations, breaking movements, plus acrobatic movements in various combinations are all expected aspects of Break Dance routines. Technical difficulty of performed elements, joining of elements (flowing acrobatic movements melding into one another), originality, etc. are all highly important, and the entire presentation will be evaluated NOTE: It is important to show more than two different figures and elements. Figures danced twice are only counted once. If repeated, the best attempt of the two will be marked.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions for Street Dance.
  5. Forbidden Movements: Elements and figures that, according to the dancer’s ability, are too difficult or that could lead to injuries or loss of life.
  6. Stage Props: As applicable for this discipline. For Teams it is also allowed to use requisites. 8. Break Dance competitions are not organized in the Children age division. 9. Procedure of Break Dance solo competition a. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute ‘warm up’ performance, which the Adjudicators do not evaluate. They then dance (not more than 3) first 40 seconds period. When all dancers finish, they start to perform the 2nd period of 40 seconds in the same order. The final performance gives the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor during the final presentations. Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).

QUALIFICATION: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round, Adjudicators should qualify the best 16. In the first round, the Adjudicators evaluate each dancer with the points from 1 to 10. Criteria for the points are:

  • bad- none of the elements are performed in correct way, out of music
  • 2- bad- one or two elements are performed correct but out of music
  • 3- not bad- dancer is performing weak, choreography is poor
  • 4- not bad- dancer is performing various elements or style
  • 5- satisfactory- dancer is performing various elements or style, but there is no fluidity or is repeating the same element two or more time
  • 6- good- dancer is performing various elements and style, there is not enough power or image is poor
  • 7- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but with the small mistakes
  • 8- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but losing the power
  • 9- excellent- dancer is using different styles and performing various elements on a very high level
  • 10- outstanding- dancer is using different styles, performing various elements and bringing personal note in performance Following the given points Adjudicators will give A, B, C, D letters and additionally X’s, for those that they want into the next round. The Scrutineers count each given letter with the points. The points are given in the following manner: A- 4 points, B- 3 points, C- 2 points, D- 1 point. The cross is counted as 0.5 point. The dancers are sorted out for the next round (spider) by the total amount of points that comes from the given letters and crosses. In case of tie the Scrutineer will use the following rule for the start numbers in tie: first, the number of letters will be counted (C and D for one start number is better than B) and if the tie cannot be broken the given points from all Adjudicators (1-10) will be used in order to select the dancers for the next round. If it is not possible to select the start numbers for the next round after procedure explained in 1 and 2, then the actual redance will be organized by giving the points from 1-10 and letters that are needed for the next round.
  1. BATTLES: In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor Adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairperson of Adjudicators) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All Adjudicators´ decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the Chairperson of Adjudicators.) If there is no clear majority in the break dance battles (crossed arms), one more round (one entrance of each) will be done. After the additional round (entrance), Adjudicators have to clearly decide about their choice, showing the hand to the dancer they would like to see as a winner. Adjudicators have to use the given Adjudicators sheet who they would like to see in the next round. The Adjudicators then show the hand to a dancer following the judging sheet. The Chairperson and Scrutineer control the showing of hands.

 

CREW BATTLES

 

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams = Crews may use their own music in the first round. Organizer’s music in Break Dance Style will be used in the final round.
  3. Duration of Performance in the first round (Show): 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) of each team’s/crew´s performance may be danced using the team’s/ crew´s music. In case that the music is too long or short the crew will be disqualified. The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will last about 5 – 10 minutes. The “Final-Battle” 10 – 15 (20) minutes, according to the Supervisors decision. The last minute will be announced.
  4. Tempo: No restrictions.
  5. Typical Break Dance Elements: Same as for Break Dance Solos, plus: Acrobatics should have some style continuation. Choreography for the exhibition to the team’s own music must be a clear performance of a team, not just a demonstration of unrelated solo performances. Musicality, difficulty of movements and figures, originality and team variability will all be highly evaluated. Synchronized movements, shadow standing, mirror positions and smooth transitions of these components from one into another, along with choreographic variability and work with space will also be evaluated. All typical elements of Break Dance should be performed – Styles – Pop Locking – Power moves – Electric Boogie.
  6. If one crew disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.
  7. The final ‘battle’ portion of each contest shall consist of individual performances of dancers from the competing crews in which each dancer must dance his or her solo part at least one time, and the crew´s performance will be Adjudicatord as a whole.
  8. Based on the first round results, the Chairperson of Adjudicators will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked crews and the 3rd – 4th ranked crews.
  9. All other rules are as outlined under Break Dance Solo.
  10. Procedure of Break Dance Team competition First round is a show of crews who will dance to their own music. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best crews. The Adjudicators give the best crew 4 points (A), the next best crew 3 points (B), the next best crew 2 points (C) and the next best crew 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best crews will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 crews in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairperson of Adjudicators may decide to ask for additional crosses for crew/crews on the next position after 4 best crews (cross means placement). Special note for Break Dance and Electric Boogie: When asked to select Adjudicators for this discipline, each nation should only invite Adjudicators who are very experienced in Break Dance and Electric Boogie. This type of VIP Adjudicator would include past champions, celebrity performers, teachers and choreographers who are all considered experts in this field. This note is intended as a guideline only, and is not a rule.

 

Електрик Буги

The categories of Electric Boogie are: Solo, Duo. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer ’s music 1 minute in all rounds, including the final round.
  2. Tempo: Solos 30-32,5 bars per minute (120-130 beats per minute). Duos 31-32,5 bars p.M. (124-130 bpm)
  3. Typical Movements and Techniques: Sharp electric movements that flow into waves, isolations, robot, pantomime elements, popping, animation, electric shock, walking, puppet, ticking, locking, etc. It is important to show more than two different techniques and movements.
  4. The dancer(s) should endeavor to create illusions in his or her performance to surprise and ‘electrify’ the audience.
  5. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adults Duos.
  6. Stage Props: are allowed, such as masks, glasses, hats etc. – but NO requisites!! Each group of competitors begins with a one-minute performance, dancing together in each round. They then dance three, two or one by one for their one-minute performance or 1 minute performance in the final round. Each group dances a final minute together in each round. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations. Both the opening and final performance give the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers.

General information

TOURNAMENT'S FORM

The tournaments are in a competitive character that will define the best dancers in each dancing category. It will also determine the exact ranking of each group with respect to other participants in the event.

INTERNATIONAL TOURNAMENT – it has been licensed and included in the International Dance Organization / IDO / calendar for 2014
The tournament is a qualificatory event that provides allowances for participation / quotas in:

THE EUROPEAN MODERN, CONTEMPORARY, JAZZ AND CLASSICAL DANCE CHAMPIONSHIP – SERBIA – 29 MAY TO 1 JUNE 2014.
THE WORLD CUP IN MODERN, CONTEMPORARY, JAZZ AND CLASSICAL DANCE FOR MINI KIDS AND MINI PRODUCTIONS – SERBIA
THE WORLD CUP IN SHOW DANCING- ITALY, FLORENCE
THE HIP HOP, ELECTRIC BOOGIE, BREAK DANCE EUROPEAN CHAMPIONSHIP IN ITALY, RIMINI – www.ido-dance.com
The HIP HOP Tournament is a qualification event for the international championship and it gives quotas for participation in the HIP HOP, HIP HOP Battle, Electric Boogie and break dance European Championship, which will be held in the Netherlands, Amsterdam – 13 -16 June 2013

WHO CAN PARTICIPATE

All Bulgarian and foreign teams will be allowed to participate. However, the European Championships and World Cups quotas will be distributed only among the members of Bulgarian Dance Sport Federation, based on ranking.

The event is open to all countries – members of the International Dance Organization / IDO /, national sports dance clubs, community centers, Palaces of children, private schools, studios, members of BSDF and BDO, and guests wishing to become members of BSDF and BDO during the tournament.

BSDF and BDO memberships are voluntary. Prospective members of BSDF and BDO are legal entities and natural persons, working in the dance sphere: clubs, choreographers, dance groups directors, etc.
All who has accepted the Statute of BSDF and BDO.
All who has completed the application and declaration.
The BDO members should have paid the 2014 membership fees and filing for each competitor.
Members of BSDF – clubs, legal entities – must have paid annual club membership fees and filing fees for each dancer for 2014.

TOURNAMENT'S PRIZE POOL

Medals – for I, II and III place
Medals for all children up to 7 years
Plaques for winners
Cups and awards from the organizers
BSDF Cups and awards
Diplomas for all participants
Diplomas for I, II, III, IV, V, VI place
Tangible prizes from sponsors
Organizer’s Award for Most original choreography, original creative development, stage makeup and hairstyle, awards for the youngest and oldest participants, etc.

DANCE CATEGORIES

Solo (1 participant – a boy or a girl)
Duet / couple (2 participants of the same sex or different)
A small group (3 to 7 people)
A Team (3 to 7 people)
Formation (8 to 24 people)
Performers: In the competing categories solo, duo / couple, the team can only participate with three dances in each age category. Additional performances over the regulated number are allowed under the following conditions:

if the dance performances are of various artists
each additional performance is charged 50% fee on top of the basic participation fee for each dancer.
Performances that are over the regulated number will be ranked, but will not enter the rating.
In the competing categories small groups and formations, the participants can only participate in one dance in each age category. Additional performances over the regulated number are allowed under the following conditions:

performances must be by different artists
each additional performance is charged 50% fee on top of the basic participation fee for each dancer.
Performances over the regulated number will be ranked, but will not enter the rating.
This rule applies to all styles in the competition. One competitor may only participate in one solo, one duet, one small group, one formation, etc.

IMPORTANT! Beginning in 2012 the styles: Dance Show, Modern and Contemporary Dance, Jazz Dance two divisions have emerged:

1. A Division – “Olympic Hopes” – dancers, who have been filed under the advanced group members in a dance club for the entire calendar year may participate;

2.B Division – “Rising Stars” – dancers, who have been filed under the beginners group members in a dance club for the entire calendar year. However, they are not allowed to participate in this division more than an year.

AGE DEVISIONS

Infants / Mini Kids / up to 7 years included. – All born in and before 2007.
Children between 8 and 11 years included. – All born between 2003 and 2006 incl.
Adolescents between 12 and 15 years – All born between 1999 and 2002 incl.
Youngsters above 16 – all born in 1998 incl. and older (1997, 1996, …………)
HOW TO DETERMINE THE AGE DIVISION OF A COMPETITOR

The determination of the age division of a competitor depends on the year of birth, compared to the year of the competition.
Duo and couples : the date of birth of the older partner determines the age division. A partner , no younger than 2 years more than the lower limit of the age group, can dance in a higher group ,if the difference in the years of the partners is not more than three years .
Example : One of the dancers is 10 years old and the other is 13 , they can dance in the youth group. But if one is 9 years old – they cannot.

Note 1: A younger dancer can dance in a higher age division , but the opposite is impossible – this means that an older dancer cannot dance in a lower age division.
Note 2: A young dancer who dances in a higher age division and who meets the requirements (for instance: an 11 year-old child dancing in the youth duo group) must participate in the same age division during the rest of the year. The dancer CANNOT dance in the kids age division with a different partner; the dancer CANNOT dance in the kids age division in solo, small group or formation.

Once the dancer has chosen to compete in a higher age division in a particular category , (for example: jazz duo) , he / she must continue in the same age division till the end of the year and he/she must not return in the previous group.
All dancers are forbidden from dancing in two age divisions. Here are the details:
Dancers cannot dance in both kids age division and adults age division – duo adolescents or young duo. However, he / she CAN stay in the same age division in other categories until he/she reaches the next age division.
For example: a child of the age of 10/11 years can dance in an adolescent duo and at the same time he/she can participate in all categories for children: solo , group formation, if the year of birth corresponds to the age division – children to the year of the competition.

Note: A dancer may only participate in one solo ,one duo / couple , one small group , one formation in a competitive dance style .

Participation of competitors in groups and formations:

Participants of one age division are not allowed to compete against participants from other age divisions.
If a team has a dancers from two adjacent age divisions, the condition for the team to participate as a group is to register the participants in the higher age group. HOWEVER, the maximum allowable number of competitors from a lower age division to pass into a higher age division is up to 50% of the team’s members.
Competitors are not allowed to skip a whole age division.

Example 1. If you have a group of ten people in the “formation” competing category – five of the participants are in the age group of up to 7 years old and the other five are in the age group of 8 to 11 years old, then the dancers from the lower age group pass into the 8 to 11 years old age division.
Example 2. If you have a small group of seven performers, three of which are 7 years old and the other four are from 8 to 11 years, then the group may be included to participate in the competition in the age group of 8 to 11 years.
Note: Participation of competitors from a higher age group in the lower age group is not allowed!!!

SIZE/RANGE OF THE FLOOR

14 x 14 m
An important requirement: One dance performance starts and ends in the outline of the competition area. Each time a competitor crosses the outline of the competition area during a performance, points will be deducted from the final score.

GENERAL CONDITIONS

The organizer reserves the right to document, broadcast, film and distribute all types of materials without paying rights and royalties.
The leaders of the team are held responsible for accidents and injuries of performers on stage and beyond it during the event.
Accommodation costs as well as travelling and daily costs of teams and people accompanying them are paid by the participants.
The cost of prizes, technical, stage and medical provision are covered by the organizers.
The team directors are responsible for the behavior of members of their teams during the event.
Participants are responsible for their costumes, props and personal items.
The music for each dance performance must be on a separate CD (one CD must contain only one track!)
Each participant may compete on behalf of only one team.
One particular dance performance that competes in a particular dance style, cannot compete in other dance style competitions organized by BSDF. This rule applies for the entire calendar 2014 . In case of rule violation, the participant is not allowed to participate on request or he/she is directly disqualified during the competition.
Special rules for costumes – change of costumes is not permitted during one’s performance during the competition. The placement of identifying club logos or slogans on costumes is not permitted.
Change in music or choreography in the next round or the final round is not permitted.
The usage of somber and dark themes , costumes and music in the children’s age division is prohibited.
A competitor may only participate in one solo , one duet , one small group , one formation ,one production, etc.

JUDGES ASSOCIATION

The evaluation will be carried out by a five (5) member jury, composed of international judges of IDO and international judges of BSDF, who are qualified in the relevant dance style. Judge – the Jury panel cannot evaluate their own group; in such cases a stand-by judge will be used. The control over the jury panel is carried out by the Main Judge.

JUDJUNG EVALUATION CRITERIA

Judging is carried out in a 3D-system, which includes the first three criteria listed below and the 4D-system includes the four criteria listed below:

Execution Technique (11 components ):
it is estimated in accordance with the accuracy of the technique while matching the style chosen by the choreographer ; the level of complexity (technical skills), originality of interpretation , execution of the selected dance technique, synchrony and rhythm .
Composition ( choreography ) (12 components ):
It is estimated in accordance with the choice of dance elements and their composition, shape, variations , the use of space on the dance site ( pattern of the dance ) , originality while using different linking and other dance figures.
Image (12 components ):
Presentation , stage and acting presence of the performers, contact with the audience , evaluation of costumes, props and stage makeup in accordance with the concept and style of the choreography. By all criteria the judging panel can give 1 to 10 points , which means that the maximum score for a performance is 30 points, and the minimum is 3 points.
Show presentation / idea ( 5 components ):
The Stage show presentation by the performers on the dance floor and its impact on the audience by presenting and recreating the scene and metaphoric imagery, drama , props / set design , acrobatics . The exact overall expression of the idea in the choreography presented through the means of exposure, development, climax and final.
By all criteria the judging panel can give 1 to 10 points , which means that the maximum score for a performance is 40 points, the minimum is 4 points.


Dance disciplines

REPRESENTATIVE DANCES

Dance compositions bearing the folklore nature of various nationalities and all theatrical dances of the peoples standing on the academic principles and requirements of the ballet and dance performance: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, modern interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc.. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should match the nature of the nationality.

The following is allowed:
The use of props appropriate to the nature of the nationality;

The following is not allowed:
the use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life endangering props on stage; Performance CANNOT use the same costume for two different dances.

Acrobatic moves 
are allowed, but only if they are key to the characteristics of the national dance. A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points.

Supports no allowed 
for children in the age category of 11 years. “Support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air.

Supports are only allowed 
if it is an essential characteristics of the national dance (no children under age 11 years is allowed to do supports). A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points. Note: BELLY DANCE and Latin shows are not allowed. 
The duration of the dance is recommended!
• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Small group – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.• Formation – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.

The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is 2:30 to 3:00 min.

Measurement of time:
From the initial position or entry of the performers on stage to the last position and exit.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 3D system. All finals are in Skating system.

ETHNO SHOW

Characteristics and Movements:
All national dances are included: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should be appropriate to the nature of the image depicted by the performance. The use of props is allowed. All props are allowed under the condition that they can be imported and exported by the performer in one entrance on stage.
Note: LATIN and BELLY DANCE SHOWs are not allowed.
The Ethno show allows the use of supports (excluding the infant age group) (“support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air) acrobatics and other theatrical effects.The use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life-threatening props as well as dance-area-polluting objects are not allowed on stage! The same costume could not be used for two different dances. Supports are prohibited in the age category of children up to 11 years.An ETHNO show must always have direction, storyline and subtle concept for the public’s amusement.

The duration of the dance is recommended!

• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.

• Small groups – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.
• Formations – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.
The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is a minimum of 2:30 up to a maximum of 3:00 min.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 4D system.

LATIN SHOW

Characteristics and movements:

When we talk about Latin music in dance styles such as rumba and samba, we do NOT expect Latin American sport dance styles and movements. We expect to see authentic rumba, authentic samba, carnival samba, etc. One of the many original dance styles is required, NOT the 5 IDSF Latin-American dances. The performances are in Latin style and they are danced on any Latin music chosen by the contestants. Options include: salsa, bachata, merengue, son or other Latin-inspired music. Costumes can be Carnival, African , futuristic , street , Caribbean or any combination of these styles or other styles suitable for performing the dance/s. The presentation may be in any form or combination of two or more different styles, including theatrical motions. The performance and costumes should not resemble the ones used in IDSF competitions in Latin-American dances.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of dances and figures, originality, overall presentation and individual choreography are all elements contestants are evaluated on. It is very important to present the harmony between the idea, music, dance, choreography, costumes and props, because the overall image of the team performances in the Latin show is evaluated.

Acrobatic moves:

Permitted.

Lifts:

NOT permitted in the child category, but are allowed in other categories.

Stage props:

All stage props are allowed under the condition that the contestants can bring it/them with one entrance of the dancing area.

MALE/ FEMALE SOLO

Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 seconds; Number of dancers: 1

DUO / Couples Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds up to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 secondsБрой танцьори: 2

SMALL GROUPS

Duration of the presentation:

A min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 3 minutes

Number of dancers:

3-7

FORMATIONS

Duration of the presentation:

a min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 4 minutes;

Number of dancers:

8-24

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 4D system.

ACROBATIC/GYMNASTIC DANCE

Characteristics and Movements:

The Acrobatic dance must include a lot of techniques, e.g.: acrobatics, balance, twisting of the body. Air hands-free figures, controlled movements and acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand supports, turns, somersault. All of them must be connected with dance moves and dance combinations. Emphasis is on strength, elasticity, control and ease of implementation, no matter what technique is being used is key.

A dance based on aerobics or sport Rock and Roll is not allowed.

In regards to the safety, it is prohibited:

• To perform supports / lifts at height bigger than the dancer’s height, as well as various hand throws of the other dancer;

• To fall on knees, stomach or back from a jumping position;

• To begin an acrobatic number from a “flight” phase;

• To perform any acrobatic element for more than three times (only variations are permitted; for example: various forms of presentation of an element – for instance, one hand wheels, wheel with a transition to the ground, elbow wheel, etc.)

Lifts, pyramids, releases:

• Lifts are permitted in the age groups of youth and adults.

• The pyramids are permitted in the age groups “youth” and “adults”. The pyramid is an element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It represents a group position in which the dancers, supporting one another, form a complex figure. During the performance the pyramid should stay fixed for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

• In the age group of young, high pyramids without assistance are prohibited.

• In the age groups of children and young people various throws of one dancer from another are prohibited;

Clothing and decorative items:

The rules for the costumes are in the General Rules of IDO.

• In terms of safety, it is forbidden to wear decorative items like earrings, nose/tongue/belly button/face/skin piercings. Sunglasses, headphones and any decorations of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are prohibited. All decorations must be removed.

(Exceptions: decorations on dresses and temporary tattoos). All accessories, such as hair accessories must be securely fastened and, if possible, must be soft and flat. Long hair must be tied up and it should not conceal the face of the performer.

Stage props:

Stage props are authorized based on the Performing Arts rules and regulations.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements, originality of composition, harmony between design, music, choreography and acrobatic elements and the performance itself are highly valued.

MTV DANCE

Characteristics:

This is a mixture of different dance styles and new creative choreographies inspired by MTV’s tradition. All techniques are allowed.

Music:

Each group selects the music it will dance to. All kinds of musical rhythms are eligible and dancers can compete in the MTV dance competitions.

Duration of the performance:

2:30 to 3:00 minutes for small groups / 3:00 to 4:00 minutes for formations

Tempo:

No restrictions

Characteristics and movements:

Canon and floor movements are allowed. The movements can emphasize the femininity and coquettishness of the female performers slightly – for example: Burlesque show. In MTV style (music videos) a number of well assessed acrobatics must be used. Stage props are allowed. Various compositions in the choreographies such as:  re-positioning, mismatching and other various dance figures are encouraged. All dance techniques are allowed.

Lifts / supports:

All are permitted (except in the children’s age categories).

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 3D system.

CHEERLEADER DANCE

Parades, performances and SPORT dances

If there is interest in this particular style we will send you the required information.

MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY DANCE

The categories of Modern and Contemporary Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.
Modern dance is an artistic form with many styles that has undergone development over a relatively long period of time.
Modern dance is a more relaxed, free style of dance in which choreographer’s uses emotions and moods to design their own steps, in contrast to ballet’s structured code of steps. It has a deliberate use of gravity, whereas ballet strives to be light and airy
The development of modern dance was the logical consequence of the dancing styles that existed at the start of the 20th century, when the modern dancers of that period attempted to break free from established ballet forms, which they considered to be stiff, strict and restrictive and therefore they started searching for new trends and techniques to give dance a new direction.
This particular dance discipline concerns using modern dancing techniques that were created for the most part during the first half of the 20th century by renowned dance teachers and choreographers, /e.g. Martha Graham, Jos? Limon, Alvin Ailey, Merce Cunningham, Lester Horton and a host of others on the American continent, and Kurt Jooss, Mery Wigman, Hanya Holm and many others in Europe /
In view of the fact that all dance remains in a constant state of movement and development, this does not mean that we have to use only the aforementioned techniques in their original forms. On the contrary, it is also about using contemporary trends in modern dance techniques that either goes back to the foundations established by the aforementioned dance instructors or we can use totally new, experimental and original concepts for modern dance. Contemporary dance brings new informations about body and how the body works, offers new quality of movement, new shapes of body in area, brings new composition process and space for experiment.

Characteristics and Movement:

the entire routine must consist of modern dance techniques and current trends, and should correspond with age categories and the movement skills of the dancers.
Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Modern dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Modern dance performances.
The main point of assessment for this discipline will be the level of the dance movements carried out, as well as the theme and story line. The story, the building of a plot, is possible, but not so much emphasized here as, for example, for Show dance. It is primarily about pictures, moods.
In Modern Dance, a story, theme, idea or concept may be used but must always be in good taste for children, junior and adult situations, but human situations, especially those dealing with intimate or personal relationships should acceptable to viewing by all ages.

Acrobatics and Lifts:

Acrobatic movements are allowed. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions and are prohibited in the Children age division.

Props and Backgrounds:

Stage props are allowed to the extent that the stage setting for the choreography does not overshadow the dance itself. Backgrounds are prohibited.

Clothing:

Aesthetic, tasteful and age division appropriate.

JAZZ DANCE/LYRICAL

The categories of Jazz Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Primitive:

This dance form stemmed from early African Folk Dances that were done by slaves brought to America from Africa, West Indies, Cuba, Panama and Haiti.

Early:

Originated via the music of the late 1800’s and early 1900’s. Dances included the Two-Step or Cakewalk, and later became the Grizzly Bear, Bunny Hug, Turkey Trot, and Texas Tommy. This evolved into the fast music and dances of the 1920’s, the One-Step, Lindy Hop, Charleston and Black Bottom.

Musical Comedy / Theatre Jazz:

These forms of Jazz became very popular via movies / theatre during the 1930s and 1940s. Many dance forms were incorporated in Musical Comedy Jazz. Ballet with “On Your Toes”, and Modern Dance in “Oklahoma” and “Brigadoon”. During the 1950s and 1960s, dance became an integral part of telling the story in Musical Theatre, as illustrated in musicals such as “Flower Drum Song”, “Destry Rides Again”, “West Side Story” and “Seven Brides for Seven Brothers”. In 1978, the musical “Dancing” showed that the songs and books were secondary to the dancing; in fact, they are almost non-existent.

Contemporary:

Primarily performed to music of the day, it began in the late 1950s to the music of Contemporary Jazz musicians like Dizzy Gillespie, Art Tatum and Dave Brubeck.

Today’s Jazz Dance:

This discipline may be danced using many different styles and tempos, using themes based on Afro-Cuban, Oriental, Spanish or other national themes. It may be performed as a character, such as Cowboy, Sailor, Clown, etc. It may also be abstract in nature. Lyrical Jazz, performed to such music as Bette Midler’s “Wind Beneath My Wings”, may be included in Jazz Dance Discipline, as well as Modern Dance.

NOTE: Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Jazz Dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Jazz Dance performances.

Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Characteristics and Movement: Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Must: The entire routine must consist of Jazz work. Jazz technique, turns, jumps isolations, stretch, as well as use of port de bras, legs and upper body. Timing and rhythm will be considered in marking. Suitable footwear must be worn.

• Acrobatic Movements: In Jazz Dance limited acrobatics will be allowed as long as a body part is touching the floor, and does not dominate the routine.

• Lifts: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions in Adult and Junior divisions.

NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age divisions.

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

Clothing: All costume accessories, such as hats, scarves, gloves, belts, etc., may be worn if they are an integral part of the costume. They may be taken off, exchanged or discarded, but not left to litter the stage. Meaning, the dancer cannot leave the stage at the end of the routine leaving clothing behind. If a dancer discards or drops a scarf on the state, they must pick it up and take it off when they leave.

Hand Props: All hand props such as canes, umbrellas, hand bags, brief cases, mirrors, flags, etc., may be used as long as they are an integral part and used throughout the routine. They may be set down on the floor as long as it remains part of the routine and picked up when leaving the stage at the end of the routine. Hand props can never be used as floor props. In other words, you cannot enter the stage with an umbrella, set it on the floor, dance your entire routine without utilizing the umbrella and then pick it up at the end of the routine and leave the stage.

Floor Props: Necessary floor props such as a chair, stool, box, ladder, etc., may be carried on by a dancer in one trip, but must be an integral part of the routine and utilized throughout the entire performance. Items used to decorate or embellish the stage are not permitted. The dancer must carry the floor prop off the state at the end of the routine.

Scenic or stage props: Any items such as a scenic background, back drop, tree or other such prop, used to create a scene or embellish the stage are not permitted.

 Lip-sync is not allowed in Jazz Dance. 

Show Dance VS Jazz 

The difference between Show Dance and Jazz is very difficult, but not impossible, to define. Jazz Dance styles range from the early 1920s to the present, and most Jazz Dance pieces are created using pure dance without consideration to theme or story. This is an ever-evolving Performing Art dance, and one could very readily argue the point that all of the Street dances contain some elements of Jazz. How do we draw the line between Jazz and Street Dance? Definitely the music. The music dictates the style. Does that mean that Hip-Hop or Break Dance music cannot be used in a Jazz piece? No, because the style of the dance dictates what discipline it actually is.

Therefore, a Jazz Dance piece can be done to Hip-Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie music, but never a Hip- Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie to Jazz music. Since there is no specific style of music identifiable as Jazz Dance or Show Dance, music cannot be used to determine if the discipline is correct. However: the difference in styles can be used to make this determination.

Although Show Dance pieces may be based on a theme or story, there are many variables that exist. A Show Dance piece can be based on emotions, color and design, or even one word, such as ‘devastation’ or ‘jubilation.’ Jazz Dance does not have to convey any of the above criteria, and may be done based on pure dance only. For instance, a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ might be based on movement formation, color and costume. Another piece danced to the same or different music might be built on a theme of floating dancers, be enhanced by costume de- sign and originality, and feature terrific use of the music. Would a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ do well in a Jazz Dance competition? The answer to that would be in the eyes of the beholder, but a strong Jazz Dance piece would certainly give such a piece a run for its money if the former was not based on true Jazz technique.

Lyric or Modern may be the base technique for either Show Dance or Jazz Dance. It all depends on how much of a ‘show’ the piece really is. A straight lyric piece to Whitney Houston, without a theme or story line, would not do very well. Judging for IDO competitions is based on the ‘3 D’ system of separate evaluations for technique, composition and image. The show quality of the routine may enter into all three of these separate dimensions. The ability to use technique to enhance the theme or story being told is very important. The choreography and the way the dancer performs it must be of show quality, and the image that the dancer creates is also very important to the show value of a given piece. But judges should not be influenced by the show value of a Jazz Dance routine. Their marks for technique should be based purely on technique, choreography purely on choreography, and image marks should be based on the total look of the performer.

BALLET

The categories in Ballet are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Time limit is one (1) minute minimum for male and female solo variations, maximum 2:15 minutes. All other time limits see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Characteristics and Movement:

Classical Ballet is the most formal of the ballet styles; it adheres to traditional ballet technique. There are variations relating to area of origin, such as Russian ballet, French ballet, British ballet and Italian ballet. The Vaganova method, named after Agrippina Vaganova and the Cecchetti method, named after Enrico Cecchetti are Russian and Italian respectively and derive from the original French method. Classical ballet is best known for its unique features and techniques, such as pointe work, turn-out of the legs, and high extensions; its graceful, flowing, precise movements; and its ethereal qualities. This discipline must be performed using the Classical Ballet Technique and style and may be performed in soft ballet slippers or Pointe shoes. Although choreography may be of a modern nature, it may not deviate from what is commonly known as Classical Ballet. Lyric, Modern and Modern Jazz pieces may not be performed in this discipline. Pointe work is not allowed in the children’s category.

Acrobatic Movements:

Not permitted in the Ballet discipline.

Lifts:

Permitted (and encouraged) as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Any lifts used must remain in the Classical Ballet tradition, and may include drop-falls, supported turns and jumps resulting in catches. However, all dances are in a constant evolution and growth, so experimental and original choreography is encouraged.

Stage Props:

Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts but dancers cannot use cumber- some scenic material and must carry on and off the stage themselves in one trip.

HIP HOP

The categories of Hip Hop are:

Solo male, Solo female, Duo, Small Group and Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO MALE, SOLO FEMALE AND DUO

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer’s music 1 minute.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute) (downbeat, more groove).
  3. Characteristics and Movement: Hip-Hop includes different new dance styles, such as Hype Dance, New-Jack- Swing, Jamming, etc., adding creative elements such as stops, jokes, flashes, swift movements, etc. Some Electric Boogie movements can be performed but should not dominate. Hip-Hop is mostly danced on the eighth notes with a typical bounce, or jumping action (New- Jack-Swing).
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  7. Special Note for Duos: Both dancers should dance together, not only for themselves or one by one. Their performance should include synchronized steps such as Follow the Leader, shadow and mirror design, as well as patterns and dancing the same steps. A mixture of all possibilities is important.

Procedure of Competition: In each round the dancers perform three (3) times. Each group of competitors begins and ends with a one-minute performance dancing together in each round. Number of dancers on the floor in subsequent rounds during second minute of performance is specified in the Section 3.12.2 General Rules & Regulations for Competitions.

Both opening and final minutes are to give the Judges an opportunity to compare dancers.

To avoid any risk of injuries Judges shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations.

SMALL GROUPS

  1. Length of Exhibition: Organizer ?s music 2 minutes.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute), downbeat, groove.
  3. Dancers of each group dance together, two or three at a time. In final round they perform one by one.
  4. Musicality, (rhythm, breaks), dance variety and originality, together with well-done and well- performed stage and individual choreography, will be highly evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of music, dance and costume, which should underline the special Hip-Hop character.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).
  7. Groups will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not control / dominate.
  8. All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo.

FORMATIONS

  1. Formations dance to their own music.
  2. Length of Exhibition: 2 minutes&30 seconds minimum to 3 minutes maximum.
  3. Tempo for Hip Hop Formation cannot be more than 30 bars per minute (120 beats), there is no limit down. However, it is allowed to be out of this tempo range for a maximum of 30 seconds.
  4. Music: Must be typically Hip Hop as it is currently known in the Hip Hop scene, including break beats.
  5. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not dominate.
  6. Lifts: Permitted only in junior and adult formation.
  7. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).

All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo & Small Group. 

SHOW DANCE

The categories in Show Dance are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation.

Adult division duo is divided in two categories:

DUO female-female

DUO male-female or duo male-male
The dancer must only be represented in either two females, two males or male/female in any given competition Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. DEFINITION OF SHOW DANCEShow Dance in the broadest sense is based either on any Jazz/Lyrical, Ballet and/or Modern and Contemporary dance technique. Other dance disciplines can also be incorporated but cannot dominate. Ballroom, Latin or Rock ’n’ Roll (in the IDSF & WDC way) are excluded and cannot be performed. Show Dance allows the use of lifts (except for Children), acrobatics, props, lip-sync and other theatrical effects. An IDO Show Dance number always has to have a guideline, story or visible concept to entertain the audience.
  2. When movements and elements of other IDO dance disciplines such as Disco Dance, Hip-Hop, Electric Boogie, Break Dance and Tap, or when American & International Ballroom and Latin Dance is used in the performance, such movements / styles should not control / dominate the performance.
  3. The dancer’s personal interpretation should be clearly evident when using any of these disciplines or styles.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Acrobatic movements will be evaluated under show criteria and must never dominate and must be in harmony with the idea or theme. If modern gymnastic movements dominates a performance a significantly reduction of points in the technique dimension should be the consequence.
  5. Lifts: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age division.
  6. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.
  1. Musicality, variety of dance and patterns, originality, total performance and individual choreography will be evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of idea, music, dance, choreography, costume and props in the presentation, as the entire image will be used in evaluating the performance.
  2. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo, duo or ensemble parts may be performed, but must not dominate.
  3. All Show Dance presentations shall be based on a concept, story, theme or idea. There must be a title of the Show. The concept, story, theme or idea must be fully understandable and will be expressed by means of dance movements that adhere to the piece being presented, along with being creative, imaginative and original. The piece must have Show Value, as explained in the Judging Procedure (Section Protocol and Judging Procedure)

MINI PRODUCTIONS AND PRODUCTIONS

A Production is defined as an elaborate theatrical presentation, dominated by dance, which may include any IDO discipline or any combination thereof, using a story, theme, or concept. Since its primary purpose will be to entertain, it will be under the jurisdiction and administration of the Performing Arts Department.

Although all IDO disciplines will compete against each other in this category, specific rules as outlined under each discipline will be adhered to unless otherwise specified in the rules that follow.

Allowable DANCE FORMS:

This category will be open to all or any combination of dance disciplines under the auspices of the IDO. Dance disciplines under the control of the WDC, the IDSF and the WRRC may not participate in any IDO event unless special dispensation is given by the official organization representing that particular discipline.

AGE Limits:

There will be no age restrictions and all ages will compete against one another. No dancer will be represented in more than one Production at any event. However, dancers may participate in both Mini and Production, as long as the content of each performance is not duplicated.

Production CATEGORIES:

  • Large Productions – called “Productions”
  • Mini ProductionsTIME Limits:Large ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 5 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)Mini ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 3 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)STAGE PROPS and SCENERY:

There will be a total of 5 minutes to set up and 5 minutes to break down scenic sets, backdrop and stage props. All set ups and breakdowns must be made by stagehands provided by the school, club or group presenting the Production. Liquids or other substances that can litter, damage or make the dance floor/stage unsafe, may not be used. Both fire and working weapons are not permitted.

NUMBER of Performers:

Large Productions

At least 25 dancers minimum, with no maximum, are allowed in this category. However, it is the producer of the production’s responsibility to make sure the stage or dance floor is large enough to accommodate the number of dancers one wishes to present.

Mini Productions

At least 3 dancers minimum, with maximum of 12 dancers, are allowed in this category.

FEES:

Every performer appearing in the Production, including dancers, singers, and musicians, along with any other supporting cast must pay the start fee outlined in the IDO Rules Book. This is a lifetime license.

PRESENTATION:

A Production may include solo, duo and ensemble performers as long as long as solo and duo performers do not dominate the performance. Both lifts and/or acrobatic movements are allowed, as long as they do not threaten the well-being of the dancers. Other theatrical effects such as fog, laser lighting, magic and illusions may be presented, without restriction, provided they are not hazardous to the performers, stagehands or audience.

MUSIC:

All types of music may be used as long as it is not offensive to the public or IDO. Music containing inappropriate or offensive lyrics will not be permitted. Live music may be used as long as the musicians are part of the Production being presented.

LIVE MUSIC

  1. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine.
  2. The Organizer must be advised by email prior to 4 weeks preceding the event. The email MUST explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  3. All equipment must be brought in and set–up by the Dancers and/or Musicians.
  4. Set–up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  5. The set-up and break down of all equipment must not take more then 5 minutes.
  6. Live music AND recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music.For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems.
    1. House system – for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only.
    2. Additional portable amplification system supplied by the entrant for live music/vocals
    3. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music
  7. Suggested live music:
    Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums and percussion, bass, keyboards. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

Responsibility of the Organizer:

It is the Organizer’s responsibility to provide normal stage amenities as out- lined in the IDO Rules Book. The Organizer must provide equal opportunity for all productions. It is the full responsibility of the school, club, group or independent entry to supply all special effects, as well as the necessary stagehands for proper and safe operation. It is also their responsibility to check with the Organizers to make sure all special effects are allowed in the auditorium or competition facility.

HIP HOP BATTLES

The categories of Hip Hop Battles are:

Solo and Teams.
Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO

Music:

  1. Organizer’s music in different Hip Hop styles.
  2. Duration of Performance: 4-6 entries, each 0:30-1:00 min.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
  • Ragga
  • R&B
  • House
  • D.step
  • Popping

3. always OLD SCHOOL

solo BATTLES

 

1st round

1/8 final

1/4 final

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. place

Battle 1/2. place

1.

1:00 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

4.

1:00 OLD

——

——

——

——

——

5.

——

——

——

——

——

——

  1. Tempo:

No restrictions, but very different because of the different styles

  1. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  2. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  3. Procedure of HipHop Solo Battle competition:
    1. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors (heats) begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute performance in “New Style”, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor.. Then they dance 2 times 30-40 seconds in some other Style: Ragga or R&B or House or D. Step or Popping or others, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor. The final performance is “Old School”, again one minute.The Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).
    2. Qualification: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round,adjudicatorsshouldqualify the best 16, which they divide into 4 classes/categories (A=best, B=2nd best, C=3rd best, D=4th best). For those whom they want to qualify, they use the following point system. The adjudicator gives the best 4 dancers 4 points(A), the next best 4 dancers 3 points(B), the next best 4 dancers 2 points(C) and the next best dancers 1 point(D) each. For those whom they do not want to qualify they give no points. According to achieved summary of points the RANKING of the 16 best dancers is made, in which first four dancers belong to A class, 4 next to B class, 4 next to C class and 4 to D class. If there are more than 20competitors in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for dancers on first next position after 16 best dancers (cross means placement on the 17th position and is taken into consideration in case of tie).

c. BATTLES:

In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairman of Judges) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All adjudicators ? decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the chairman of judges.

Ranking after the 1st round:

1A 5B 9C 13D

2A 6B 10C 14D

3A 7B 11C 15D

4A 8B 12C 16D

 If there is 10 to 17 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 8 dancers, 2 of class A (4 points), 2 of class B (3 points), 2 of class C (2 points), and 2 of class D (1 point). Then in next round there are only 4 battles (A1/D8; B3/C6; A2/D7; B4/C5). The winners of these four battles will go on to two battles and finally will be one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place.

If there is less than 10 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 4 dancers, one of each class and then there are only 2 battles (A1/D4 and B2/C3); followed by battles of the winners of previous 2 battles (one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place).

TEAM

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams may use their own music in the first round. Organizer ’s music will be used from 2nd round.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
    • Ragga
    • R&B
    • House
    • D.step
    • Popping
  3. always OLD SCHOOL

team BATTLES

 

1st round

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. and 1/2. place

1.

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

4.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

5.

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD
  1. Duration of Performance: 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) in first round (Show). The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will have up to 5 entries (different styles). The “Final-Battle” up to 7 entries (different styles).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Stage props are allowed in hip hop battle teams.
  4. If one team disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.

Based on the first round results, the Chairman of Judges will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked teams an d the 3rd – 4th ranked teams.

All other rules are as outlined under SOLO. Procedure of HipHop Battle Team competition:

First round is a show of teams who will dance to their own music. Judges must be aware that teams are presenting at least 2 different styles. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best teams. The Adjudicators give the best team 4 points (A), the next best team 3 points(B), the next best team 2 points(C) and the next best team 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best teams will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 teams in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for team/teams on the next position after 4 best teams (cross means placement).

If the time frame allows, Organizer Chairman and Supervisor can decide, to use the big spider (as Solos), so there go 8 or 16 teams into the battles.

TAP DANCE

The categories of Tap Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Trio, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Although the primary emphasis should be on the harmonious blend of the dancer’s footwork (sound), many variables exist. All forms of tap will compete against each other, such as: Rhythm, Hoofing, Buck and Wing, Waltz Clog, Military, Precision Kick Line, Latin and Musical Theater. 2. Jingle taps, double taps or double claques are not permitted.
  2. The music must not contain prerecorded taps.
  3. Personal amplification devices are not permitted.
  4. No more than 30 seconds of a cappella or tacet (silence) may be used in any one routine. The absence of music must occur within the music and not at the beginning or end. “Stop Time” is an open part of a measure of music, not played but silent, with some notes being played. “A Capella” is an open phrase of multiple measures in length, but completely absent (silent) of any/all music.

NOTE: Music must be played at the beginning and end of the music and the A Capella must be no longer than 30 seconds. A Capella can also be defined as “Tacit.”

  1. The dancer’s taps and the music must be clearly audible to the audience and adjudicators. NOTE: The Organizer must make sure the stage has adequate floor microphones and speakers to make this possible.
  2. Acrobatic Movements that are an integral part of the routine are permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts, but will not enhance the dancer’s score. (see in General Rules restriction for Children, p.42)
  3. Regarding health and safety issues in Tap dance, it is not allowed to dance or perform toe work (dancing on pointe) in the Children’s age division for longer than one beat of music. The definition of this being dancing or standing on the tips of the toes in weight-bearing steps on one or both feet. Toe work/dancing on pointe will be for no longer than one beat of the music on one or both feet in Children’s Division. NOTE: No more than one beat and NO weight bearing pointe work at any time. This is stated strictly to clarify the rule already in effect

LIVE MUSIC during Junior and Adult Groups:

  1. This is a separate category and cannot be mixed with other categories.
  2. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine. The ages of the musicians are not relevant unless they are also dancers.
  3. The Organizer must be advised by email 4 weeks prior to the event. The email must explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  4. All equipment must be brought in and set up by the Dancers and/or musicians.
  5. Set up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  6. The set up and break down of the musical equipment and portable amplification must not take more than 3 minutes.
  7. Live music and recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music. For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems: a. House system for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only. b. The entrant may supply additional portable amplification system for live music/vocals. c. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music 8. Suggested live music: Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums, percussion, bass and keyboards may be used to make music. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

ACROBATIC DANCE

The categories of Acrobatic/ Gymnastic Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Characteristics and Movement: Acrobatic dance shall include many techniques, such as tumbling, balancing, contortions, and aerial tricks without hands and controlled movement, as well as acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand support elements, turns, rolls, walkovers and saltos, all of which should be connected with dance movement and dance combinations. The emphasis is on strength, stretch, control and ease of movement, no matter what technique is being used. It is forbidden to form routine on the basic Aerobic and sport Rock’ n ’Roll ­elements. For safety reasons it is forbidden in all age divisions: · To perform supports/lifts higher than dancers’ height as well as different throws from hands of other dancer except in the adult division. · To fall on the knees, stomach and back from the jumping position; · To begin an acrobatic walkover within flight phase; – To perform any acrobatic element more than three times (variations are allowed i.e. performance of different forms of the element. For example: cartwheel, one hand cartwheel, cartwheel with transition to the floor, elbow cartwheel etc.). · To perform headstand (head balance).

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

BOLLYWOOD

The categories of Bollywood are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Although Bollywood dance has its origins in Traditional Indian dance, it is made up of many differing dance styles including Indian Classical, Bhangra, Arabic, Folk, Tribal, Latino, Hip Hop, Street Dance, “Michael Jackson”, and many others.

We must, however, remember that in Bollywood there must be a contrast of dance styles and movement, depending on the music. It is important to use Lip Sync and Mime, to encourage enactment of some of the lyrics. This discipline must apply technique, grace, speed, style, versatility, body isolation, spatial awareness, energy, facial expression and emotion, whether solo, towards a partner or within a group. Many Bollywood dancers are also actors, so this skill needs to be shown.

MOVEMENT: We would expect to see much Indian dance influence, including Hand Gestures, Postures, Head Slides, Classical moves in arms, legs, feet, knee squats, etc., even within very Modern pieces.

COSTUME: This can be from Classical Indian (with or without ghunghroos/ankle bells) to a “Hoodie Look” to Futuristic, and even a mix, as long as it is in keeping with the dance style, music, Production piece, but still remain tasteful, and respect age.

FACIAL EXPRESSION: This is a very important part of Bollywood, so all parts of the face need to be worked. Eyes especially play an important part. Within this section we would expect to see Lip Sync, as well as many different emotions.

MAKE UP: Must be in keeping at all times, and must respect age. LIFTS & ACROBATICS: These may be included, again, as long as they are in keeping (although not expected). Lifts are not permitted for Children and Mini Kids. AGE: In Productions can be mix of all age divisions. PROPS & SCENERY: All exactly as Performing Arts. However, hand props such as a hand mirror, flowers, jewellery, etc., can play an important role in a performance.

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

CHARACTER / FOLK DANCE SHOW/ ETHNIC

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Character Dance pertains to dances portraying characters from traditional Ballets, Opera, Broadway style Musical Theatre, TV or Video. The range of characters is very broad and may include: The Wolf from Peter and the Wolf, Little Red Riding Hood, a Bird, Dog, Cat, Flower, Butterfly, Animal, Sailor, Nurse, Religious Preacher, Pauper, Prince or Shirley Temple. Costuming, music and dance movements must be appropriate to the character being presented.

Folk and Ethnic Dance: These disciplines must be Traditional Dances of any Nationality, passed down from generation to generation, and may include: Polonaise, Polynesian, American Indian, Highland Fling, Flamenco, Japanese Candle Dance, Hindu, Tarantella, African, etc. Traditional / authentic costuming and music is expected, and will be used in the total evaluation.

  1. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE:

Arabic folk dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Recommended Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Falaahii · Baladi Shaabi (used only for children vocals) · Muashahat · Bandari · Simsimiya (Bambuti) · Bedouin Not recommended for children Style: · Moroccan · Iraqi · Tunisian (because there are movements of after wedding ceremony) · Algerian · Iranian · Shamadan · Eskandarani · ritual dances and other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style For example: Sticks for Saidi… Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the organizer the dance style, they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.

4.1 Time Limits: ORIENTAL DANCE SOLO Preliminaries, 1/8, 1/16, etc. Organizer’s Music 1 minute all together – 1 minute improvisation in a group of 4-6 1 minute all together 10-12 ¼ and Semi-final own music 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, ORIENTAL SHOW DANCE (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATION Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes

4.2 Length of Solo parts in categories: Note: In Duo, Group, Formation it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. 5. Rules for the Costume

5.1 Oriental Dance Costume may consist of – Special integral dress – Long skirt and traditional or stylized top over a tricot – Pantaloons or leggins worn with a long skirt Children should be encouraged to dress like children and not like teens and adults. Dancers in the children’s division may never appear nude, so that cosume should be integral and must not distort body natural for this age. Limits: – Rather shallow neckline (not allowed deep decollete) – Covered shoulders (costume must have sleeves of any length) – Slit must not be higher than knee – All dancers in the children division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace, but NOT skin colored) Prohibited: – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but the same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves and to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Intimate parts of body (bust, buttock and pubic area) must be covered with cloth materials or must have a lining (not skin colored)

5.2 Oriental Folk Costume must correspond to the chosen dance style. It must also correspond to general limits of children’s costume

5.3 Oriental Show Costume can be of any type but it must correspond to general limits of children’s costumes Prohibited: – Costume materials that suggest sexual, deviate, sadomasochistic or other adult themes – Deep neckline – All dancers in the children’s division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace materials, but NOT skin colored) – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but he same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves ot to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Allowed: – Mini skirts and shorts if it is required by the image. In this case, the costume must fit in way to cover the intimate parts of the dancer´s body (buttock and pubic area) during all the performance – Light make-up, if it is required by the image

  1. Choreography and Image Children should appear as children and not as teens and adults. Their image, music and choreography should be appropriate to the children’s age division. Children’s costumes, hair and make-up must be age appropriate and not distort the age of the child. It is possible to use make-up in Oriental Show Dance discipline to bring out the features of the face or to portray a character. In other Oriental dance disciplines it is prohibited to use make-up.
  2. In the Children’s Age Division it is forbidden to: – use a parter in Oriental dance discipline, while it is allowed in Oriental Folk and Oriental Show disciplines, if it is required by the image – use sharp cutting devices (knives, swords, etc.), if they are not dummy – the extensively executed shimmy movement in standing and walking positions is allowed not more than 4 bars – Use make-up (except Oriental Show ,

BELLY DANCE

Belly Dance / Oriental Show Belly Dance / Oriental Show Folk Belly Dance / Oriental Folk The categories are: Solo Female, Solo Male (only in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show), Duo, Group (3-7 dancers), Formation (8-24 dancers) AGE DIVISIONS All listed Belly Dance disciplines are only for Junior and older age divisions. Seniors may compete in Adult 2 AGE DIVISION AGE RANGE (years of birth listed below are for competition year 2018) Junior 12 – 15 (born in 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006) Adult 1 Adult 2 16 and over (born in 2002, 2001, 2000, 1999, 1998, 1997, 1996, …) 31 and over (born in 1987 and before) Senior 50 and over (Belly Dance /Oriental) (born in 1968, 1967, 1966, …) Dance disciplines for BELLY DANCE: Improvising in drum solo and Raqs Sharqi with organizers music.

3.1. BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: based on the classical style Raqs Sharqi and includes or may consist of elements of Oriental folk dances and styles, but they should not dominate. It is forbidden to use acrobatic movements or lifts, use props or accessories except of canes, finger cymbals, and “conventional veils”. Veils that have been made into “wings” by the use of rods are permitted if they are not the focus of the choreography and are used for dramatic effect at the beginning or end of the piece. Musical accompaniment for BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: classical instrumental work with possible accompaniment of vocals. Modern or pop versions of music may be used if the dance and image created conform to the aforementioned principles.

3.2 Show BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL Show: choreography with compulsory show elements may incorporate any form of dance, however BELLY DANCE original technique predominates. It is allowed to use oriental props and appropriate accessories (two veils, Isis wings, saber, vases, knives, and etc.) and any type of costume. Lifts and acrobatics are allowed. Various dances, styles and fusions of fantasy styles like flamenco oriental, Tribal, oriental tango, gothic and others are welcome. There has to be a development of the plot (introduction, culmination, finale). Competitors in Show BELLY DANCE/Oriental Show should provide the Organizer the title of their show. Stage props and scenery may be used if the competitors themselves put the objects in place during a single visit to the stage and remove them without the help of non-performers. Musical accompaniment for SHOW BELLY DANCE can be any kind of music. Scenic props – limit to bring: 15 seconds solo/duo; 25 seconds group; 45 seconds formation.

 

3.3 ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE: Oriental Folk Dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Alexandrian

Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Shamadan · Falaahii · Bedouin · Moroccan · Tunisian · Algerian · Iranian And other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style e.g. an original Shamadan (it is not allowed to switch on the candles), sticks for Saidi, a pitcher for Tunisian. Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the Organizer the dance style they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.
  2. Duration of the Performance page 55 BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SOLO Juniors, Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors Preliminaries 1/8, 1/16, etc ORGANIZER’S MUSIC 1 minute (Improvising in Drum solo together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Drum solo by group of dancers 4 to 6, 1 minute (Raqs Sharqi together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Raqs Sharqi solo by group of dancers 4 to 6 ¼ and ½ Final, competitors own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes DUOS All rounds 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:30 – 4:00 minutes

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, SHOW BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SHOW (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Juniors Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Juniors, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATION All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 3:00 – 4:00 minutes

Note: In Duo, Group, Formation, it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. Re-dance is possible in following: Re-dance live with compulsory music, paper re-dance and re-dance for the 1st place in the final round (only for competitors in tie for the 1st place). 6. Rules for Costumes

6.1 Change of Costumes and Choreography BELLY DANCE/Oriental Solo Juniors, Seniors: costume may be changed for each round but it is not mandatory. Adult 1 and Adults 2 – ¼ final and ½ final can be the same choreography. Final has to be a new choreography and costume. The dancer’s choreography and image must coincide with the age division in which they are competing. All dancers have to stay on the floor during the whole performance. NOTE: In Oriental Show and Oriental Folk disciplines, in all the rounds a dancer must perform the same choreography

6.2 Costume Limits: – Costume must cover all the intimate parts of a dancer during all the performance. The intimate parts are: bust, buttock,pubic area – Intimate parts must be covered with cloth materials of any color (except skin color and tan materials). In case of using lace materials, the costume must have a not see-through lining – In case of using skin colored materials to cover intimate parts, the costume must not imply nudity. So, these parts must be decorated with lace, strass etc. – The costume must fit in way to cover intimate parts of dancer during all the performance. – It is recommended that all male dancers wear a men´s dance belt underneath their costume. A costume consisting only of a men´s dance belt is prohibited. Male dancers are allowed to perform bare-chested

6.2.1 Belly Dance / Oriental Possible to use integral dress or special bra with a skirt (with or without belt) Upper Body – Forbidden to use open bra – The distance between the bra cups should not be more than 5 cm

Lower Body – Lower part of costume should be a skirt (slit skirt or simple skirt) – Fitting the lower part of the costume should ensure the cover of the vertical line of the buttocks. – Buttocks and Pubic area must be covered with cloth material – In case of the lower part of the costume (skirt) made with see-through or lace materials, the intimate parts must be covered with special panties. – The panties should cover the entire buttock in the back. In the front, the panty line should follow the line between the body and the flexed leg. The distance from the hip line to the panty line should be at least 5 centimetres (2 inches) when measure from the side (pants must cover buttocks and pubic area). – Abbreviated bikini bottoms, thongs, thong appliqués and any shorts imitating a thong look are prohibited. The dancers should make sure their costumes fit properly, as ill-fitting shorts or panties can wedge or otherwise expose the buttock in a way that is prohibited. – The panties must have the same color as the costume. Panties made with skin colored, lace or net materials are forbidden. – A dance costume should not be associated with a beach suit and/or underwear. – In case of a slit skirt, the slit should start not higher than at a distance of 10 cm from the iliac bones.

6.2.2 Oriental Folk The costume should completely correspond to the chosen style. When choosing a costume design, one should follow the general restrictions on costumes (item 6.2). The folk costume should not look open, therefore these elements are not recommended: – High slits (above the middle of the hip) – See-through or lace materials (in case of its use, a costume must have a not see-through lining)

6.2.3 Oriental Show costume can be of any type, but it must comply with the general rules of costumes, including all the restrictions (item 6.2)

6.2.4 Age Restrictions: Costumes and Image Juniors: Juniors should always be dressed age-appropriately and their image should be that of a junior and not that of an adult. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: “adult” costumes; high slits; see-through or skin colored materials. Adults: Adult dancers should bear in mind that they are the ones setting the trend for the younger dancers, who look up to them and seek inspiration from them. This is why it is very important to be dressed in a good taste. Seniors: When choosing a costume for Seniors, should be considered the physiological characteristics, as well as the moral component of the image of dancers of “elegant” age. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: high slits; see -through or net materials.

  1. Dancer’s Number

7.1 For dancers in the show and folk categories it is not necessary to affix their assigned number to their costume.

7.2 For all quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in all categories it is not necessary to affix the competitor’s assigned number to their costume.

7.3 Master of Ceremonies is required to: in quarter-final, semi-final and final competition announce the competitor’s number and full name. For quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in Belly Dance/Oriental Solos, Duos, Groups and Formations – the name of the ensemble or pseudonym (stage name) is sufficient, as it is in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show Dance. 8. Competitors During their Performance 8.1 In Duo, Group, Formation categories all dancers have to stay on the dance floor during the whole performance from the beginning of composition until the end. 9. All dancers have to be ready to dance 30 minutes before their start time and they must give their music to the sound engineer at least 60 minutes prior to the start time. 10. Safety 10.1 It is forbidden to use an open flame, liquids or other substances that may leave the floor wet, damage the stage surface or make it unsafe.

10.2. It is forbidden to use live animals.

  1. Notes for the Organizers When organizing a BELLY DANCE event it is necessary to:

11.1 Ensure that the dance surface is kept clean.

11.2 It is the Organizer’s responsibility to ensure that during the preliminaries for the Adult categories the compulsory music is changed for each heat so that all competitors have equal opportunity for improvising.

11.3 After the semi-final results have been announced for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 a break of at least 15 minutes should be provided so the finalists may change their costumes and music be prepared for the final.

11.4 Provide videotaping of the semi-final and final rounds for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 category in order to check that the rules have been followed with regard to the mandatory change of costume and choreography. 1

FLAMENCO

The categories in Flamenco are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

  1. SOLO PERFORMERS
  2. Solo performers represent one dance on a competition.
  3. Duration of dance up to 3 minutes
  4. The dance can be both in “puro” style, and in a modern direction of flamenco – “fusion”.
  5. Use of additional subjects is allowed.
  6. Participation in dance of supernumeraries or dancers of the second plan is forbidden.

Costumes:

  1. Performers dance in any flamenco dress.
  2. Dance may be performed in trousers if that is demanded by staging. 3. Additional accessories are allowed.
  3. DUOS Duo will be danced by female/female, male/female or male/male – The first round will be organizer’s music to Sevillanas for 1 to 1:15 minutes. The duo can choose one of the 4 parts of the Sevillanas. – The second round for those who have passed to the next round then do a performance to music of their own choice, which can be no longer than 3:30 and no less than 2:30. DUO Costume Regulations 1. First Round – Costumes should be identical for both dancers (an identical style, color, quantity of frill- son a skirt, etc.) – Additional accessories are allowed.
  4. Second Round – Costumes of dancers can be either in identical style, or differ in details. For example, an identical style of top, different skirts, different breed of a dress. – Absolutely different dresses are forbidden. – Dresses should be one style. – Accessories are allowed.
  5. GROUPS The group consist of 3 to 7 competitors. Competitors can present any dance, in any direction of flamenco – “puro”, “fusion”. The time limits: The first round can be no less than 2:30 and not longer than 3:30. In the final round the time limit is raised to 4:30 with a minimum of 2:30. Sevillianas may be used in Small Group.
  6. FORMATION Formations consist of 8 to 24 competitors The dance-group represents one number in any direction of flamenco, with additional subjects, or without them. The same rules will apply as for Group, but the final round will be increased to 5:00. In the Children’s division the limit will be 3:00 minimum and 4:00 maximum.
  7. Group and Formation Costume Regulations · Dresses should be presented in one style. · Distinctions in details of a dress are possible. · Additional accessories are allowed. · Use of man’s suits, at presentation of dance by girls, is allowed. The costume must fit the type of dance they are doing. Hand props may be used such as castanets, fans, Bolero hats and canes. Characteristic: The majority of the dance must be traditional Flamenco to Flamenco music. Deviations from the above must be minor.

BREAK DANCE

The categories of Break Dance are: Solo and Crews. Starting January 1st, 2018 the categories of Break Dance are: Solo Female, Solo Male (B-Boys and B-Girls) and Crews (ADM 2017, Implementation 1.1.2018, no change possible before 2021) Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines. Break Dance is for Juniors and Adults only SOLO 1. Music: Organizer’s music in Break Dance style.

  1. Duration of Performance: Preliminary round: 2 minutes divided into three sections of 40 seconds duration each. Additional opening minute of the 1st round is not evaluated. In the preliminary round, there must be no more than three (3) competitors dancing together. The Chairperson of Adjudicators determines the number of competitors in the opening minute and final 40 seconds in the preliminary round. The best 16 competitors fight in “battles” one by one in a “knock-out-system” (5 – 10 minutes each battle).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Typical Break Dance Elements: Crown, Headspin, Backspin, Turtle, Helicopter, Windmill, Bailey Windmill, Uprock, Freeze, Sixstep, One Hand Up, Swipe, Atomic, Flair, Holoback, Traxx, 99, variable footwork, etc., including different variations of these figures, elements and movements. Keen ‘breaks’ (stopping of movement), isolations, breaking movements, plus acrobatic movements in various combinations are all expected aspects of Break Dance routines. Technical difficulty of performed elements, joining of elements (flowing acrobatic movements melding into one another), originality, etc. are all highly important, and the entire presentation will be evaluated NOTE: It is important to show more than two different figures and elements. Figures danced twice are only counted once. If repeated, the best attempt of the two will be marked.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions for Street Dance.
  5. Forbidden Movements: Elements and figures that, according to the dancer’s ability, are too difficult or that could lead to injuries or loss of life.
  6. Stage Props: As applicable for this discipline. For Teams it is also allowed to use requisites. 8. Break Dance competitions are not organized in the Children age division. 9. Procedure of Break Dance solo competition a. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute ‘warm up’ performance, which the Adjudicators do not evaluate. They then dance (not more than 3) first 40 seconds period. When all dancers finish, they start to perform the 2nd period of 40 seconds in the same order. The final performance gives the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor during the final presentations. Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).

QUALIFICATION: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round, Adjudicators should qualify the best 16. In the first round, the Adjudicators evaluate each dancer with the points from 1 to 10. Criteria for the points are:

  • bad- none of the elements are performed in correct way, out of music
  • 2- bad- one or two elements are performed correct but out of music
  • 3- not bad- dancer is performing weak, choreography is poor
  • 4- not bad- dancer is performing various elements or style
  • 5- satisfactory- dancer is performing various elements or style, but there is no fluidity or is repeating the same element two or more time
  • 6- good- dancer is performing various elements and style, there is not enough power or image is poor
  • 7- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but with the small mistakes
  • 8- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but losing the power
  • 9- excellent- dancer is using different styles and performing various elements on a very high level
  • 10- outstanding- dancer is using different styles, performing various elements and bringing personal note in performance Following the given points Adjudicators will give A, B, C, D letters and additionally X’s, for those that they want into the next round. The Scrutineers count each given letter with the points. The points are given in the following manner: A- 4 points, B- 3 points, C- 2 points, D- 1 point. The cross is counted as 0.5 point. The dancers are sorted out for the next round (spider) by the total amount of points that comes from the given letters and crosses. In case of tie the Scrutineer will use the following rule for the start numbers in tie: first, the number of letters will be counted (C and D for one start number is better than B) and if the tie cannot be broken the given points from all Adjudicators (1-10) will be used in order to select the dancers for the next round. If it is not possible to select the start numbers for the next round after procedure explained in 1 and 2, then the actual redance will be organized by giving the points from 1-10 and letters that are needed for the next round.
  1. BATTLES: In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor Adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairperson of Adjudicators) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All Adjudicators´ decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the Chairperson of Adjudicators.) If there is no clear majority in the break dance battles (crossed arms), one more round (one entrance of each) will be done. After the additional round (entrance), Adjudicators have to clearly decide about their choice, showing the hand to the dancer they would like to see as a winner. Adjudicators have to use the given Adjudicators sheet who they would like to see in the next round. The Adjudicators then show the hand to a dancer following the judging sheet. The Chairperson and Scrutineer control the showing of hands.

 

CREW BATTLES

 

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams = Crews may use their own music in the first round. Organizer’s music in Break Dance Style will be used in the final round.
  3. Duration of Performance in the first round (Show): 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) of each team’s/crew´s performance may be danced using the team’s/ crew´s music. In case that the music is too long or short the crew will be disqualified. The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will last about 5 – 10 minutes. The “Final-Battle” 10 – 15 (20) minutes, according to the Supervisors decision. The last minute will be announced.
  4. Tempo: No restrictions.
  5. Typical Break Dance Elements: Same as for Break Dance Solos, plus: Acrobatics should have some style continuation. Choreography for the exhibition to the team’s own music must be a clear performance of a team, not just a demonstration of unrelated solo performances. Musicality, difficulty of movements and figures, originality and team variability will all be highly evaluated. Synchronized movements, shadow standing, mirror positions and smooth transitions of these components from one into another, along with choreographic variability and work with space will also be evaluated. All typical elements of Break Dance should be performed – Styles – Pop Locking – Power moves – Electric Boogie.
  6. If one crew disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.
  7. The final ‘battle’ portion of each contest shall consist of individual performances of dancers from the competing crews in which each dancer must dance his or her solo part at least one time, and the crew´s performance will be Adjudicatord as a whole.
  8. Based on the first round results, the Chairperson of Adjudicators will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked crews and the 3rd – 4th ranked crews.
  9. All other rules are as outlined under Break Dance Solo.
  10. Procedure of Break Dance Team competition First round is a show of crews who will dance to their own music. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best crews. The Adjudicators give the best crew 4 points (A), the next best crew 3 points (B), the next best crew 2 points (C) and the next best crew 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best crews will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 crews in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairperson of Adjudicators may decide to ask for additional crosses for crew/crews on the next position after 4 best crews (cross means placement). Special note for Break Dance and Electric Boogie: When asked to select Adjudicators for this discipline, each nation should only invite Adjudicators who are very experienced in Break Dance and Electric Boogie. This type of VIP Adjudicator would include past champions, celebrity performers, teachers and choreographers who are all considered experts in this field. This note is intended as a guideline only, and is not a rule.

 

ELECTRIC BOOGIE

The categories of Electric Boogie are: Solo, Duo. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer ’s music 1 minute in all rounds, including the final round.
  2. Tempo: Solos 30-32,5 bars per minute (120-130 beats per minute). Duos 31-32,5 bars p.M. (124-130 bpm)
  3. Typical Movements and Techniques: Sharp electric movements that flow into waves, isolations, robot, pantomime elements, popping, animation, electric shock, walking, puppet, ticking, locking, etc. It is important to show more than two different techniques and movements.
  4. The dancer(s) should endeavor to create illusions in his or her performance to surprise and ‘electrify’ the audience.
  5. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adults Duos.
  6. Stage Props: are allowed, such as masks, glasses, hats etc. – but NO requisites!! Each group of competitors begins with a one-minute performance, dancing together in each round. They then dance three, two or one by one for their one-minute performance or 1 minute performance in the final round. Each group dances a final minute together in each round. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations. Both the opening and final performance give the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers.

Dance disciplines

 PERFORMING ARTS: 

SHOW DANCE

The categories in Show Dance are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation.

Adult division duo is divided in two categories:

DUO female-female

DUO male-female or duo male-male
The dancer must only be represented in either two females, two males or male/female in any given competition Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. DEFINITION OF SHOW DANCEShow Dance in the broadest sense is based either on any Jazz/Lyrical, Ballet and/or Modern and Contemporary dance technique. Other dance disciplines can also be incorporated but cannot dominate. Ballroom, Latin or Rock ’n’ Roll (in the IDSF & WDC way) are excluded and cannot be performed. Show Dance allows the use of lifts (except for Children), acrobatics, props, lip-sync and other theatrical effects. An IDO Show Dance number always has to have a guideline, story or visible concept to entertain the audience.
  2. When movements and elements of other IDO dance disciplines such as Disco Dance, Hip-Hop, Electric Boogie, Break Dance and Tap, or when American & International Ballroom and Latin Dance is used in the performance, such movements / styles should not control / dominate the performance.
  3. The dancer’s personal interpretation should be clearly evident when using any of these disciplines or styles.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Acrobatic movements will be evaluated under show criteria and must never dominate and must be in harmony with the idea or theme. If modern gymnastic movements dominates a performance a significantly reduction of points in the technique dimension should be the consequence.
  5. Lifts: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age division.
  6. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.
  1. Musicality, variety of dance and patterns, originality, total performance and individual choreography will be evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of idea, music, dance, choreography, costume and props in the presentation, as the entire image will be used in evaluating the performance.
  2. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo, duo or ensemble parts may be performed, but must not dominate.
  3. All Show Dance presentations shall be based on a concept, story, theme or idea. There must be a title of the Show. The concept, story, theme or idea must be fully understandable and will be expressed by means of dance movements that adhere to the piece being presented, along with being creative, imaginative and original. The piece must have Show Value, as explained in the Judging Procedure (Section Protocol and Judging Procedure)

OPEN SHOW DANCE

The categories in Show Dance are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation.

Adult division duo is divided in two categories:

DUO female-female

DUO male-female or duo male-male
The dancer must only be represented in either two females, two males or male/female in any given competition Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. DEFINITION OF SHOW DANCEShow Dance in the broadest sense is based either on any Jazz/Lyrical, Ballet and/or Modern and Contemporary dance technique. Other dance disciplines can also be incorporated but cannot dominate. Ballroom, Latin or Rock ’n’ Roll (in the IDSF & WDC way) are excluded and cannot be performed. Show Dance allows the use of lifts (except for Children), acrobatics, props, lip-sync and other theatrical effects. An IDO Show Dance number always has to have a guideline, story or visible concept to entertain the audience.
  2. When movements and elements of other IDO dance disciplines such as Disco Dance, Hip-Hop, Electric Boogie, Break Dance and Tap, or when American & International Ballroom and Latin Dance is used in the performance, such movements / styles should not control / dominate the performance.
  3. The dancer’s personal interpretation should be clearly evident when using any of these disciplines or styles.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Acrobatic movements will be evaluated under show criteria and must never dominate and must be in harmony with the idea or theme. If modern gymnastic movements dominates a performance a significantly reduction of points in the technique dimension should be the consequence.
  5. Lifts: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age division.
  6. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.
  1. Musicality, variety of dance and patterns, originality, total performance and individual choreography will be evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of idea, music, dance, choreography, costume and props in the presentation, as the entire image will be used in evaluating the performance.
  2. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo, duo or ensemble parts may be performed, but must not dominate.
  3. All Show Dance presentations shall be based on a concept, story, theme or idea. There must be a title of the Show. The concept, story, theme or idea must be fully understandable and will be expressed by means of dance movements that adhere to the piece being presented, along with being creative, imaginative and original. The piece must have Show Value, as explained in the Judging Procedure (Section Protocol and Judging Procedure)

JAZZ DANCE/LYRICAL

The categories of Jazz Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Primitive:

This dance form stemmed from early African Folk Dances that were done by slaves brought to America from Africa, West Indies, Cuba, Panama and Haiti.

Early:

Originated via the music of the late 1800’s and early 1900’s. Dances included the Two-Step or Cakewalk, and later became the Grizzly Bear, Bunny Hug, Turkey Trot, and Texas Tommy. This evolved into the fast music and dances of the 1920’s, the One-Step, Lindy Hop, Charleston and Black Bottom.

Musical Comedy / Theatre Jazz:

These forms of Jazz became very popular via movies / theatre during the 1930s and 1940s. Many dance forms were incorporated in Musical Comedy Jazz. Ballet with “On Your Toes”, and Modern Dance in “Oklahoma” and “Brigadoon”. During the 1950s and 1960s, dance became an integral part of telling the story in Musical Theatre, as illustrated in musicals such as “Flower Drum Song”, “Destry Rides Again”, “West Side Story” and “Seven Brides for Seven Brothers”. In 1978, the musical “Dancing” showed that the songs and books were secondary to the dancing; in fact, they are almost non-existent.

Contemporary:

Primarily performed to music of the day, it began in the late 1950s to the music of Contemporary Jazz musicians like Dizzy Gillespie, Art Tatum and Dave Brubeck.

Today’s Jazz Dance:

This discipline may be danced using many different styles and tempos, using themes based on Afro-Cuban, Oriental, Spanish or other national themes. It may be performed as a character, such as Cowboy, Sailor, Clown, etc. It may also be abstract in nature. Lyrical Jazz, performed to such music as Bette Midler’s “Wind Beneath My Wings”, may be included in Jazz Dance Discipline, as well as Modern Dance.

NOTE: Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Jazz Dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Jazz Dance performances.

Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Characteristics and Movement: Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Must: The entire routine must consist of Jazz work. Jazz technique, turns, jumps isolations, stretch, as well as use of port de bras, legs and upper body. Timing and rhythm will be considered in marking. Suitable footwear must be worn.

• Acrobatic Movements: In Jazz Dance limited acrobatics will be allowed as long as a body part is touching the floor, and does not dominate the routine.

• Lifts: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions in Adult and Junior divisions.

NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age divisions.

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

Clothing: All costume accessories, such as hats, scarves, gloves, belts, etc., may be worn if they are an integral part of the costume. They may be taken off, exchanged or discarded, but not left to litter the stage. Meaning, the dancer cannot leave the stage at the end of the routine leaving clothing behind. If a dancer discards or drops a scarf on the state, they must pick it up and take it off when they leave.

Hand Props: All hand props such as canes, umbrellas, hand bags, brief cases, mirrors, flags, etc., may be used as long as they are an integral part and used throughout the routine. They may be set down on the floor as long as it remains part of the routine and picked up when leaving the stage at the end of the routine. Hand props can never be used as floor props. In other words, you cannot enter the stage with an umbrella, set it on the floor, dance your entire routine without utilizing the umbrella and then pick it up at the end of the routine and leave the stage.

Floor Props: Necessary floor props such as a chair, stool, box, ladder, etc., may be carried on by a dancer in one trip, but must be an integral part of the routine and utilized throughout the entire performance. Items used to decorate or embellish the stage are not permitted. The dancer must carry the floor prop off the state at the end of the routine.

Scenic or stage props: Any items such as a scenic background, back drop, tree or other such prop, used to create a scene or embellish the stage are not permitted.

 Lip-sync is not allowed in Jazz Dance. 

Show Dance VS Jazz 

The difference between Show Dance and Jazz is very difficult, but not impossible, to define. Jazz Dance styles range from the early 1920s to the present, and most Jazz Dance pieces are created using pure dance without consideration to theme or story. This is an ever-evolving Performing Art dance, and one could very readily argue the point that all of the Street dances contain some elements of Jazz. How do we draw the line between Jazz and Street Dance? Definitely the music. The music dictates the style. Does that mean that Hip-Hop or Break Dance music cannot be used in a Jazz piece? No, because the style of the dance dictates what discipline it actually is.

Therefore, a Jazz Dance piece can be done to Hip-Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie music, but never a Hip- Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie to Jazz music. Since there is no specific style of music identifiable as Jazz Dance or Show Dance, music cannot be used to determine if the discipline is correct. However: the difference in styles can be used to make this determination.

Although Show Dance pieces may be based on a theme or story, there are many variables that exist. A Show Dance piece can be based on emotions, color and design, or even one word, such as ‘devastation’ or ‘jubilation.’ Jazz Dance does not have to convey any of the above criteria, and may be done based on pure dance only. For instance, a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ might be based on movement formation, color and costume. Another piece danced to the same or different music might be built on a theme of floating dancers, be enhanced by costume de- sign and originality, and feature terrific use of the music. Would a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ do well in a Jazz Dance competition? The answer to that would be in the eyes of the beholder, but a strong Jazz Dance piece would certainly give such a piece a run for its money if the former was not based on true Jazz technique.

Lyric or Modern may be the base technique for either Show Dance or Jazz Dance. It all depends on how much of a ‘show’ the piece really is. A straight lyric piece to Whitney Houston, without a theme or story line, would not do very well. Judging for IDO competitions is based on the ‘3 D’ system of separate evaluations for technique, composition and image. The show quality of the routine may enter into all three of these separate dimensions. The ability to use technique to enhance the theme or story being told is very important. The choreography and the way the dancer performs it must be of show quality, and the image that the dancer creates is also very important to the show value of a given piece. But judges should not be influenced by the show value of a Jazz Dance routine. Their marks for technique should be based purely on technique, choreography purely on choreography, and image marks should be based on the total look of the performer.

TAP DANCE

The categories of Tap Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Trio, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Although the primary emphasis should be on the harmonious blend of the dancer’s footwork (sound), many variables exist. All forms of tap will compete against each other, such as: Rhythm, Hoofing, Buck and Wing, Waltz Clog, Military, Precision Kick Line, Latin and Musical Theater. 2. Jingle taps, double taps or double claques are not permitted.
  2. The music must not contain prerecorded taps.
  3. Personal amplification devices are not permitted.
  4. No more than 30 seconds of a cappella or tacet (silence) may be used in any one routine. The absence of music must occur within the music and not at the beginning or end. “Stop Time” is an open part of a measure of music, not played but silent, with some notes being played. “A Capella” is an open phrase of multiple measures in length, but completely absent (silent) of any/all music.

NOTE: Music must be played at the beginning and end of the music and the A Capella must be no longer than 30 seconds. A Capella can also be defined as “Tacit.”

  1. The dancer’s taps and the music must be clearly audible to the audience and adjudicators. NOTE: The Organizer must make sure the stage has adequate floor microphones and speakers to make this possible.
  2. Acrobatic Movements that are an integral part of the routine are permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts, but will not enhance the dancer’s score. (see in General Rules restriction for Children, p.42)
  3. Regarding health and safety issues in Tap dance, it is not allowed to dance or perform toe work (dancing on pointe) in the Children’s age division for longer than one beat of music. The definition of this being dancing or standing on the tips of the toes in weight-bearing steps on one or both feet. Toe work/dancing on pointe will be for no longer than one beat of the music on one or both feet in Children’s Division. NOTE: No more than one beat and NO weight bearing pointe work at any time. This is stated strictly to clarify the rule already in effect

LIVE MUSIC during Junior and Adult Groups:

  1. This is a separate category and cannot be mixed with other categories.
  2. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine. The ages of the musicians are not relevant unless they are also dancers.
  3. The Organizer must be advised by email 4 weeks prior to the event. The email must explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  4. All equipment must be brought in and set up by the Dancers and/or musicians.
  5. Set up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  6. The set up and break down of the musical equipment and portable amplification must not take more than 3 minutes.
  7. Live music and recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music. For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems: a. House system for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only. b. The entrant may supply additional portable amplification system for live music/vocals. c. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music 8. Suggested live music: Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums, percussion, bass and keyboards may be used to make music. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

ACROBATIC/GYMNASTIC DANCE

Characteristics and Movements:

The Acrobatic dance must include a lot of techniques, e.g.: acrobatics, balance, twisting of the body. Air hands-free figures, controlled movements and acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand supports, turns, somersault. All of them must be connected with dance moves and dance combinations. Emphasis is on strength, elasticity, control and ease of implementation, no matter what technique is being used is key.

A dance based on aerobics or sport Rock and Roll is not allowed.

In regards to the safety, it is prohibited:

• To perform supports / lifts at height bigger than the dancer’s height, as well as various hand throws of the other dancer;

• To fall on knees, stomach or back from a jumping position;

• To begin an acrobatic number from a “flight” phase;

• To perform any acrobatic element for more than three times (only variations are permitted; for example: various forms of presentation of an element – for instance, one hand wheels, wheel with a transition to the ground, elbow wheel, etc.)

Lifts, pyramids, releases:

• Lifts are permitted in the age groups of youth and adults.

• The pyramids are permitted in the age groups “youth” and “adults”. The pyramid is an element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It represents a group position in which the dancers, supporting one another, form a complex figure. During the performance the pyramid should stay fixed for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

• In the age group of young, high pyramids without assistance are prohibited.

• In the age groups of children and young people various throws of one dancer from another are prohibited;

Clothing and decorative items:

The rules for the costumes are in the General Rules of IDO.

• In terms of safety, it is forbidden to wear decorative items like earrings, nose/tongue/belly button/face/skin piercings. Sunglasses, headphones and any decorations of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are prohibited. All decorations must be removed.

(Exceptions: decorations on dresses and temporary tattoos). All accessories, such as hair accessories must be securely fastened and, if possible, must be soft and flat. Long hair must be tied up and it should not conceal the face of the performer.

Stage props:

Stage props are authorized based on the Performing Arts rules and regulations.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements, originality of composition, harmony between design, music, choreography and acrobatic elements and the performance itself are highly valued.

BALLET - REPERTOIRE/OPEN

The categories in Ballet are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Time limit is one (1) minute minimum for male and female solo variations, maximum 2:15 minutes. All other time limits see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Characteristics and Movement:

Classical Ballet is the most formal of the ballet styles; it adheres to traditional ballet technique. There are variations relating to area of origin, such as Russian ballet, French ballet, British ballet and Italian ballet. The Vaganova method, named after Agrippina Vaganova and the Cecchetti method, named after Enrico Cecchetti are Russian and Italian respectively and derive from the original French method. Classical ballet is best known for its unique features and techniques, such as pointe work, turn-out of the legs, and high extensions; its graceful, flowing, precise movements; and its ethereal qualities. This discipline must be performed using the Classical Ballet Technique and style and may be performed in soft ballet slippers or Pointe shoes. Although choreography may be of a modern nature, it may not deviate from what is commonly known as Classical Ballet. Lyric, Modern and Modern Jazz pieces may not be performed in this discipline. Pointe work is not allowed in the children’s category.

Acrobatic Movements:

Not permitted in the Ballet discipline.

Lifts:

Permitted (and encouraged) as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Any lifts used must remain in the Classical Ballet tradition, and may include drop-falls, supported turns and jumps resulting in catches. However, all dances are in a constant evolution and growth, so experimental and original choreography is encouraged.

Stage Props:

Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts but dancers cannot use cumber- some scenic material and must carry on and off the stage themselves in one trip.

NEO CLASSICS

Lorem Ipsum is simply dummy text of the printing and typesetting industry. Lorem Ipsum has been the industrys standard dummy text ever since the 1500s.

MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY DANCE

The categories of Modern and Contemporary Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.
Modern dance is an artistic form with many styles that has undergone development over a relatively long period of time.
Modern dance is a more relaxed, free style of dance in which choreographer’s uses emotions and moods to design their own steps, in contrast to ballet’s structured code of steps. It has a deliberate use of gravity, whereas ballet strives to be light and airy
The development of modern dance was the logical consequence of the dancing styles that existed at the start of the 20th century, when the modern dancers of that period attempted to break free from established ballet forms, which they considered to be stiff, strict and restrictive and therefore they started searching for new trends and techniques to give dance a new direction.
This particular dance discipline concerns using modern dancing techniques that were created for the most part during the first half of the 20th century by renowned dance teachers and choreographers, /e.g. Martha Graham, Jos? Limon, Alvin Ailey, Merce Cunningham, Lester Horton and a host of others on the American continent, and Kurt Jooss, Mery Wigman, Hanya Holm and many others in Europe /
In view of the fact that all dance remains in a constant state of movement and development, this does not mean that we have to use only the aforementioned techniques in their original forms. On the contrary, it is also about using contemporary trends in modern dance techniques that either goes back to the foundations established by the aforementioned dance instructors or we can use totally new, experimental and original concepts for modern dance. Contemporary dance brings new informations about body and how the body works, offers new quality of movement, new shapes of body in area, brings new composition process and space for experiment.

Characteristics and Movement:

the entire routine must consist of modern dance techniques and current trends, and should correspond with age categories and the movement skills of the dancers.
Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Modern dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Modern dance performances.
The main point of assessment for this discipline will be the level of the dance movements carried out, as well as the theme and story line. The story, the building of a plot, is possible, but not so much emphasized here as, for example, for Show dance. It is primarily about pictures, moods.
In Modern Dance, a story, theme, idea or concept may be used but must always be in good taste for children, junior and adult situations, but human situations, especially those dealing with intimate or personal relationships should acceptable to viewing by all ages.

Acrobatics and Lifts:

Acrobatic movements are allowed. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions and are prohibited in the Children age division.

Props and Backgrounds:

Stage props are allowed to the extent that the stage setting for the choreography does not overshadow the dance itself. Backgrounds are prohibited.

Clothing:

Aesthetic, tasteful and age division appropriate.

BOLLYWOOD

The categories of Bollywood are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Although Bollywood dance has its origins in Traditional Indian dance, it is made up of many differing dance styles including Indian Classical, Bhangra, Arabic, Folk, Tribal, Latino, Hip Hop, Street Dance, “Michael Jackson”, and many others.

We must, however, remember that in Bollywood there must be a contrast of dance styles and movement, depending on the music. It is important to use Lip Sync and Mime, to encourage enactment of some of the lyrics. This discipline must apply technique, grace, speed, style, versatility, body isolation, spatial awareness, energy, facial expression and emotion, whether solo, towards a partner or within a group. Many Bollywood dancers are also actors, so this skill needs to be shown.

MOVEMENT: We would expect to see much Indian dance influence, including Hand Gestures, Postures, Head Slides, Classical moves in arms, legs, feet, knee squats, etc., even within very Modern pieces.

COSTUME: This can be from Classical Indian (with or without ghunghroos/ankle bells) to a “Hoodie Look” to Futuristic, and even a mix, as long as it is in keeping with the dance style, music, Production piece, but still remain tasteful, and respect age.

FACIAL EXPRESSION: This is a very important part of Bollywood, so all parts of the face need to be worked. Eyes especially play an important part. Within this section we would expect to see Lip Sync, as well as many different emotions.

MAKE UP: Must be in keeping at all times, and must respect age. LIFTS & ACROBATICS: These may be included, again, as long as they are in keeping (although not expected). Lifts are not permitted for Children and Mini Kids. AGE: In Productions can be mix of all age divisions. PROPS & SCENERY: All exactly as Performing Arts. However, hand props such as a hand mirror, flowers, jewellery, etc., can play an important role in a performance.

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

CHARACTER / FOLK DANCE SHOW/ ETHNIC

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Character Dance pertains to dances portraying characters from traditional Ballets, Opera, Broadway style Musical Theatre, TV or Video. The range of characters is very broad and may include: The Wolf from Peter and the Wolf, Little Red Riding Hood, a Bird, Dog, Cat, Flower, Butterfly, Animal, Sailor, Nurse, Religious Preacher, Pauper, Prince or Shirley Temple. Costuming, music and dance movements must be appropriate to the character being presented.

Folk and Ethnic Dance: These disciplines must be Traditional Dances of any Nationality, passed down from generation to generation, and may include: Polonaise, Polynesian, American Indian, Highland Fling, Flamenco, Japanese Candle Dance, Hindu, Tarantella, African, etc. Traditional / authentic costuming and music is expected, and will be used in the total evaluation.

  1. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.

FOLK DANCE SHOW

ETHNO SHOW

Characteristics and Movements:
All national dances are included: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should be appropriate to the nature of the image depicted by the performance. The use of props is allowed. All props are allowed under the condition that they can be imported and exported by the performer in one entrance on stage.
Note: LATIN and BELLY DANCE SHOWs are not allowed.
The Ethno show allows the use of supports (excluding the infant age group) (“support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air) acrobatics and other theatrical effects.The use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life-threatening props as well as dance-area-polluting objects are not allowed on stage! The same costume could not be used for two different dances. Supports are prohibited in the age category of children up to 11 years.An ETHNO show must always have direction, storyline and subtle concept for the public’s amusement.

The duration of the dance is recommended!

• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.

• Small groups – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.
• Formations – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.
The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is a minimum of 2:30 up to a maximum of 3:00 min.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 4D system.

BELLY DANCE / ORIENTAL

Belly Dance / Oriental Show Belly Dance / Oriental Show Folk Belly Dance / Oriental Folk The categories are: Solo Female, Solo Male (only in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show), Duo, Group (3-7 dancers), Formation (8-24 dancers) AGE DIVISIONS All listed Belly Dance disciplines are only for Junior and older age divisions. Seniors may compete in Adult 2 AGE DIVISION AGE RANGE (years of birth listed below are for competition year 2018) Junior 12 – 15 (born in 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006) Adult 1 Adult 2 16 and over (born in 2002, 2001, 2000, 1999, 1998, 1997, 1996, …) 31 and over (born in 1987 and before) Senior 50 and over (Belly Dance /Oriental) (born in 1968, 1967, 1966, …) Dance disciplines for BELLY DANCE: Improvising in drum solo and Raqs Sharqi with organizers music.

3.1. BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: based on the classical style Raqs Sharqi and includes or may consist of elements of Oriental folk dances and styles, but they should not dominate. It is forbidden to use acrobatic movements or lifts, use props or accessories except of canes, finger cymbals, and “conventional veils”. Veils that have been made into “wings” by the use of rods are permitted if they are not the focus of the choreography and are used for dramatic effect at the beginning or end of the piece. Musical accompaniment for BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: classical instrumental work with possible accompaniment of vocals. Modern or pop versions of music may be used if the dance and image created conform to the aforementioned principles.

3.2 Show BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL Show: choreography with compulsory show elements may incorporate any form of dance, however BELLY DANCE original technique predominates. It is allowed to use oriental props and appropriate accessories (two veils, Isis wings, saber, vases, knives, and etc.) and any type of costume. Lifts and acrobatics are allowed. Various dances, styles and fusions of fantasy styles like flamenco oriental, Tribal, oriental tango, gothic and others are welcome. There has to be a development of the plot (introduction, culmination, finale). Competitors in Show BELLY DANCE/Oriental Show should provide the Organizer the title of their show. Stage props and scenery may be used if the competitors themselves put the objects in place during a single visit to the stage and remove them without the help of non-performers. Musical accompaniment for SHOW BELLY DANCE can be any kind of music. Scenic props – limit to bring: 15 seconds solo/duo; 25 seconds group; 45 seconds formation.

 

3.3 ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE: Oriental Folk Dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Alexandrian

Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Shamadan · Falaahii · Bedouin · Moroccan · Tunisian · Algerian · Iranian And other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style e.g. an original Shamadan (it is not allowed to switch on the candles), sticks for Saidi, a pitcher for Tunisian. Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the Organizer the dance style they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.
  2. Duration of the Performance page 55 BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SOLO Juniors, Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors Preliminaries 1/8, 1/16, etc ORGANIZER’S MUSIC 1 minute (Improvising in Drum solo together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Drum solo by group of dancers 4 to 6, 1 minute (Raqs Sharqi together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Raqs Sharqi solo by group of dancers 4 to 6 ¼ and ½ Final, competitors own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes DUOS All rounds 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:30 – 4:00 minutes

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, SHOW BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SHOW (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Juniors Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Juniors, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATION All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 3:00 – 4:00 minutes

Note: In Duo, Group, Formation, it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. Re-dance is possible in following: Re-dance live with compulsory music, paper re-dance and re-dance for the 1st place in the final round (only for competitors in tie for the 1st place). 6. Rules for Costumes

6.1 Change of Costumes and Choreography BELLY DANCE/Oriental Solo Juniors, Seniors: costume may be changed for each round but it is not mandatory. Adult 1 and Adults 2 – ¼ final and ½ final can be the same choreography. Final has to be a new choreography and costume. The dancer’s choreography and image must coincide with the age division in which they are competing. All dancers have to stay on the floor during the whole performance. NOTE: In Oriental Show and Oriental Folk disciplines, in all the rounds a dancer must perform the same choreography

6.2 Costume Limits: – Costume must cover all the intimate parts of a dancer during all the performance. The intimate parts are: bust, buttock,pubic area – Intimate parts must be covered with cloth materials of any color (except skin color and tan materials). In case of using lace materials, the costume must have a not see-through lining – In case of using skin colored materials to cover intimate parts, the costume must not imply nudity. So, these parts must be decorated with lace, strass etc. – The costume must fit in way to cover intimate parts of dancer during all the performance. – It is recommended that all male dancers wear a men´s dance belt underneath their costume. A costume consisting only of a men´s dance belt is prohibited. Male dancers are allowed to perform bare-chested

6.2.1 Belly Dance / Oriental Possible to use integral dress or special bra with a skirt (with or without belt) Upper Body – Forbidden to use open bra – The distance between the bra cups should not be more than 5 cm

Lower Body – Lower part of costume should be a skirt (slit skirt or simple skirt) – Fitting the lower part of the costume should ensure the cover of the vertical line of the buttocks. – Buttocks and Pubic area must be covered with cloth material – In case of the lower part of the costume (skirt) made with see-through or lace materials, the intimate parts must be covered with special panties. – The panties should cover the entire buttock in the back. In the front, the panty line should follow the line between the body and the flexed leg. The distance from the hip line to the panty line should be at least 5 centimetres (2 inches) when measure from the side (pants must cover buttocks and pubic area). – Abbreviated bikini bottoms, thongs, thong appliqués and any shorts imitating a thong look are prohibited. The dancers should make sure their costumes fit properly, as ill-fitting shorts or panties can wedge or otherwise expose the buttock in a way that is prohibited. – The panties must have the same color as the costume. Panties made with skin colored, lace or net materials are forbidden. – A dance costume should not be associated with a beach suit and/or underwear. – In case of a slit skirt, the slit should start not higher than at a distance of 10 cm from the iliac bones.

6.2.2 Oriental Folk The costume should completely correspond to the chosen style. When choosing a costume design, one should follow the general restrictions on costumes (item 6.2). The folk costume should not look open, therefore these elements are not recommended: – High slits (above the middle of the hip) – See-through or lace materials (in case of its use, a costume must have a not see-through lining)

6.2.3 Oriental Show costume can be of any type, but it must comply with the general rules of costumes, including all the restrictions (item 6.2)

6.2.4 Age Restrictions: Costumes and Image Juniors: Juniors should always be dressed age-appropriately and their image should be that of a junior and not that of an adult. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: “adult” costumes; high slits; see-through or skin colored materials. Adults: Adult dancers should bear in mind that they are the ones setting the trend for the younger dancers, who look up to them and seek inspiration from them. This is why it is very important to be dressed in a good taste. Seniors: When choosing a costume for Seniors, should be considered the physiological characteristics, as well as the moral component of the image of dancers of “elegant” age. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: high slits; see -through or net materials.

  1. Dancer’s Number

7.1 For dancers in the show and folk categories it is not necessary to affix their assigned number to their costume.

7.2 For all quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in all categories it is not necessary to affix the competitor’s assigned number to their costume.

7.3 Master of Ceremonies is required to: in quarter-final, semi-final and final competition announce the competitor’s number and full name. For quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in Belly Dance/Oriental Solos, Duos, Groups and Formations – the name of the ensemble or pseudonym (stage name) is sufficient, as it is in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show Dance. 8. Competitors During their Performance 8.1 In Duo, Group, Formation categories all dancers have to stay on the dance floor during the whole performance from the beginning of composition until the end. 9. All dancers have to be ready to dance 30 minutes before their start time and they must give their music to the sound engineer at least 60 minutes prior to the start time. 10. Safety 10.1 It is forbidden to use an open flame, liquids or other substances that may leave the floor wet, damage the stage surface or make it unsafe.

10.2. It is forbidden to use live animals.

  1. Notes for the Organizers When organizing a BELLY DANCE event it is necessary to:

11.1 Ensure that the dance surface is kept clean.

11.2 It is the Organizer’s responsibility to ensure that during the preliminaries for the Adult categories the compulsory music is changed for each heat so that all competitors have equal opportunity for improvising.

11.3 After the semi-final results have been announced for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 a break of at least 15 minutes should be provided so the finalists may change their costumes and music be prepared for the final.

11.4 Provide videotaping of the semi-final and final rounds for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 category in order to check that the rules have been followed with regard to the mandatory change of costume and choreography. 1

FLAMENCO

The categories in Flamenco are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

  1. SOLO PERFORMERS
  2. Solo performers represent one dance on a competition.
  3. Duration of dance up to 3 minutes
  4. The dance can be both in “puro” style, and in a modern direction of flamenco – “fusion”.
  5. Use of additional subjects is allowed.
  6. Participation in dance of supernumeraries or dancers of the second plan is forbidden.

Costumes:

  1. Performers dance in any flamenco dress.
  2. Dance may be performed in trousers if that is demanded by staging. 3. Additional accessories are allowed.
  3. DUOS Duo will be danced by female/female, male/female or male/male – The first round will be organizer’s music to Sevillanas for 1 to 1:15 minutes. The duo can choose one of the 4 parts of the Sevillanas. – The second round for those who have passed to the next round then do a performance to music of their own choice, which can be no longer than 3:30 and no less than 2:30. DUO Costume Regulations 1. First Round – Costumes should be identical for both dancers (an identical style, color, quantity of frill- son a skirt, etc.) – Additional accessories are allowed.
  4. Second Round – Costumes of dancers can be either in identical style, or differ in details. For example, an identical style of top, different skirts, different breed of a dress. – Absolutely different dresses are forbidden. – Dresses should be one style. – Accessories are allowed.
  5. GROUPS The group consist of 3 to 7 competitors. Competitors can present any dance, in any direction of flamenco – “puro”, “fusion”. The time limits: The first round can be no less than 2:30 and not longer than 3:30. In the final round the time limit is raised to 4:30 with a minimum of 2:30. Sevillianas may be used in Small Group.
  6. FORMATION Formations consist of 8 to 24 competitors The dance-group represents one number in any direction of flamenco, with additional subjects, or without them. The same rules will apply as for Group, but the final round will be increased to 5:00. In the Children’s division the limit will be 3:00 minimum and 4:00 maximum.
  7. Group and Formation Costume Regulations · Dresses should be presented in one style. · Distinctions in details of a dress are possible. · Additional accessories are allowed. · Use of man’s suits, at presentation of dance by girls, is allowed. The costume must fit the type of dance they are doing. Hand props may be used such as castanets, fans, Bolero hats and canes. Characteristic: The majority of the dance must be traditional Flamenco to Flamenco music. Deviations from the above must be minor.

REPRESENTATIVE DANCES

Dance compositions bearing the folklore nature of various nationalities and all theatrical dances of the peoples standing on the academic principles and requirements of the ballet and dance performance: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, modern interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc.. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should match the nature of the nationality.

The following is allowed:
The use of props appropriate to the nature of the nationality;

The following is not allowed:
the use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life endangering props on stage; Performance CANNOT use the same costume for two different dances.

Acrobatic moves 
are allowed, but only if they are key to the characteristics of the national dance. A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points.

Supports no allowed 
for children in the age category of 11 years. “Support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air.

Supports are only allowed 
if it is an essential characteristics of the national dance (no children under age 11 years is allowed to do supports). A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points. Note: BELLY DANCE and Latin shows are not allowed. 
The duration of the dance is recommended!
• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Small group – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.• Formation – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.

The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is 2:30 to 3:00 min.

Measurement of time:
From the initial position or entry of the performers on stage to the last position and exit.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 3D system. All finals are in Skating system.

LATIN SHOW

Characteristics and movements:

When we talk about Latin music in dance styles such as rumba and samba, we do NOT expect Latin American sport dance styles and movements. We expect to see authentic rumba, authentic samba, carnival samba, etc. One of the many original dance styles is required, NOT the 5 IDSF Latin-American dances. The performances are in Latin style and they are danced on any Latin music chosen by the contestants. Options include: salsa, bachata, merengue, son or other Latin-inspired music. Costumes can be Carnival, African , futuristic , street , Caribbean or any combination of these styles or other styles suitable for performing the dance/s. The presentation may be in any form or combination of two or more different styles, including theatrical motions. The performance and costumes should not resemble the ones used in IDSF competitions in Latin-American dances.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of dances and figures, originality, overall presentation and individual choreography are all elements contestants are evaluated on. It is very important to present the harmony between the idea, music, dance, choreography, costumes and props, because the overall image of the team performances in the Latin show is evaluated.

Acrobatic moves:

Permitted.

Lifts:

NOT permitted in the child category, but are allowed in other categories.

Stage props:

All stage props are allowed under the condition that the contestants can bring it/them with one entrance of the dancing area.

MALE/ FEMALE SOLO

Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 seconds; Number of dancers: 1

DUO / Couples Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds up to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 secondsБрой танцьори: 2

SMALL GROUPS

Duration of the presentation:

A min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 3 minutes

Number of dancers:

3-7

FORMATIONS

Duration of the presentation:

a min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 4 minutes;

Number of dancers:

8-24

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 4D system.

MTV DANCE

Characteristics:

This is a mixture of different dance styles and new creative choreographies inspired by MTV’s tradition. All techniques are allowed.

Music:

Each group selects the music it will dance to. All kinds of musical rhythms are eligible and dancers can compete in the MTV dance competitions.

Duration of the performance:

2:30 to 3:00 minutes for small groups / 3:00 to 4:00 minutes for formations

Tempo:

No restrictions

Characteristics and movements:

Canon and floor movements are allowed. The movements can emphasize the femininity and coquettishness of the female performers slightly – for example: Burlesque show. In MTV style (music videos) a number of well assessed acrobatics must be used. Stage props are allowed. Various compositions in the choreographies such as:  re-positioning, mismatching and other various dance figures are encouraged. All dance techniques are allowed.

Lifts / supports:

All are permitted (except in the children’s age categories).

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 3D system.

CHEERLEADER DANCE

Parades, performances and SPORT dances

If there is interest in this particular style we will send you the required information.

HIP HOP

The categories of Hip Hop are:

Solo male, Solo female, Duo, Small Group and Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO MALE, SOLO FEMALE AND DUO

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer’s music 1 minute.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute) (downbeat, more groove).
  3. Characteristics and Movement: Hip-Hop includes different new dance styles, such as Hype Dance, New-Jack- Swing, Jamming, etc., adding creative elements such as stops, jokes, flashes, swift movements, etc. Some Electric Boogie movements can be performed but should not dominate. Hip-Hop is mostly danced on the eighth notes with a typical bounce, or jumping action (New- Jack-Swing).
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  7. Special Note for Duos: Both dancers should dance together, not only for themselves or one by one. Their performance should include synchronized steps such as Follow the Leader, shadow and mirror design, as well as patterns and dancing the same steps. A mixture of all possibilities is important.

Procedure of Competition: In each round the dancers perform three (3) times. Each group of competitors begins and ends with a one-minute performance dancing together in each round. Number of dancers on the floor in subsequent rounds during second minute of performance is specified in the Section 3.12.2 General Rules & Regulations for Competitions.

Both opening and final minutes are to give the Judges an opportunity to compare dancers.

To avoid any risk of injuries Judges shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations.

SMALL GROUPS

  1. Length of Exhibition: Organizer ?s music 2 minutes.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute), downbeat, groove.
  3. Dancers of each group dance together, two or three at a time. In final round they perform one by one.
  4. Musicality, (rhythm, breaks), dance variety and originality, together with well-done and well- performed stage and individual choreography, will be highly evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of music, dance and costume, which should underline the special Hip-Hop character.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).
  7. Groups will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not control / dominate.
  8. All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo.

FORMATIONS

  1. Formations dance to their own music.
  2. Length of Exhibition: 2 minutes&30 seconds minimum to 3 minutes maximum.
  3. Tempo for Hip Hop Formation cannot be more than 30 bars per minute (120 beats), there is no limit down. However, it is allowed to be out of this tempo range for a maximum of 30 seconds.
  4. Music: Must be typically Hip Hop as it is currently known in the Hip Hop scene, including break beats.
  5. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not dominate.
  6. Lifts: Permitted only in junior and adult formation.
  7. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).

All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo & Small Group. 

MINI PRODUCTIONS AND PRODUCTIONS

A Production is defined as an elaborate theatrical presentation, dominated by dance, which may include any IDO discipline or any combination thereof, using a story, theme, or concept. Since its primary purpose will be to entertain, it will be under the jurisdiction and administration of the Performing Arts Department.

Although all IDO disciplines will compete against each other in this category, specific rules as outlined under each discipline will be adhered to unless otherwise specified in the rules that follow.

Allowable DANCE FORMS:

This category will be open to all or any combination of dance disciplines under the auspices of the IDO. Dance disciplines under the control of the WDC, the IDSF and the WRRC may not participate in any IDO event unless special dispensation is given by the official organization representing that particular discipline.

AGE Limits:

There will be no age restrictions and all ages will compete against one another. No dancer will be represented in more than one Production at any event. However, dancers may participate in both Mini and Production, as long as the content of each performance is not duplicated.

Production CATEGORIES:

  • Large Productions – called “Productions”
  • Mini ProductionsTIME Limits:Large ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 5 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)Mini ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 3 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)STAGE PROPS and SCENERY:

There will be a total of 5 minutes to set up and 5 minutes to break down scenic sets, backdrop and stage props. All set ups and breakdowns must be made by stagehands provided by the school, club or group presenting the Production. Liquids or other substances that can litter, damage or make the dance floor/stage unsafe, may not be used. Both fire and working weapons are not permitted.

NUMBER of Performers:

Large Productions

At least 25 dancers minimum, with no maximum, are allowed in this category. However, it is the producer of the production’s responsibility to make sure the stage or dance floor is large enough to accommodate the number of dancers one wishes to present.

Mini Productions

At least 3 dancers minimum, with maximum of 12 dancers, are allowed in this category.

FEES:

Every performer appearing in the Production, including dancers, singers, and musicians, along with any other supporting cast must pay the start fee outlined in the IDO Rules Book. This is a lifetime license.

PRESENTATION:

A Production may include solo, duo and ensemble performers as long as long as solo and duo performers do not dominate the performance. Both lifts and/or acrobatic movements are allowed, as long as they do not threaten the well-being of the dancers. Other theatrical effects such as fog, laser lighting, magic and illusions may be presented, without restriction, provided they are not hazardous to the performers, stagehands or audience.

MUSIC:

All types of music may be used as long as it is not offensive to the public or IDO. Music containing inappropriate or offensive lyrics will not be permitted. Live music may be used as long as the musicians are part of the Production being presented.

LIVE MUSIC

  1. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine.
  2. The Organizer must be advised by email prior to 4 weeks preceding the event. The email MUST explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  3. All equipment must be brought in and set–up by the Dancers and/or Musicians.
  4. Set–up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  5. The set-up and break down of all equipment must not take more then 5 minutes.
  6. Live music AND recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music.For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems.
    1. House system – for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only.
    2. Additional portable amplification system supplied by the entrant for live music/vocals
    3. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music
  7. Suggested live music:
    Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums and percussion, bass, keyboards. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

Responsibility of the Organizer:

It is the Organizer’s responsibility to provide normal stage amenities as out- lined in the IDO Rules Book. The Organizer must provide equal opportunity for all productions. It is the full responsibility of the school, club, group or independent entry to supply all special effects, as well as the necessary stagehands for proper and safe operation. It is also their responsibility to check with the Organizers to make sure all special effects are allowed in the auditorium or competition facility.

HIP HOP BATTLES

The categories of Hip Hop Battles are:

Solo and Teams.
Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO

Music:

  1. Organizer’s music in different Hip Hop styles.
  2. Duration of Performance: 4-6 entries, each 0:30-1:00 min.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
  • Ragga
  • R&B
  • House
  • D.step
  • Popping

3. always OLD SCHOOL

solo BATTLES

 

1st round

1/8 final

1/4 final

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. place

Battle 1/2. place

1.

1:00 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

4.

1:00 OLD

——

——

——

——

——

5.

——

——

——

——

——

——

  1. Tempo:

No restrictions, but very different because of the different styles

  1. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  2. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  3. Procedure of HipHop Solo Battle competition:
    1. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors (heats) begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute performance in “New Style”, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor.. Then they dance 2 times 30-40 seconds in some other Style: Ragga or R&B or House or D. Step or Popping or others, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor. The final performance is “Old School”, again one minute.The Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).
    2. Qualification: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round,adjudicatorsshouldqualify the best 16, which they divide into 4 classes/categories (A=best, B=2nd best, C=3rd best, D=4th best). For those whom they want to qualify, they use the following point system. The adjudicator gives the best 4 dancers 4 points(A), the next best 4 dancers 3 points(B), the next best 4 dancers 2 points(C) and the next best dancers 1 point(D) each. For those whom they do not want to qualify they give no points. According to achieved summary of points the RANKING of the 16 best dancers is made, in which first four dancers belong to A class, 4 next to B class, 4 next to C class and 4 to D class. If there are more than 20competitors in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for dancers on first next position after 16 best dancers (cross means placement on the 17th position and is taken into consideration in case of tie).

c. BATTLES:

In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairman of Judges) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All adjudicators ? decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the chairman of judges.

Ranking after the 1st round:

1A 5B 9C 13D

2A 6B 10C 14D

3A 7B 11C 15D

4A 8B 12C 16D

 If there is 10 to 17 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 8 dancers, 2 of class A (4 points), 2 of class B (3 points), 2 of class C (2 points), and 2 of class D (1 point). Then in next round there are only 4 battles (A1/D8; B3/C6; A2/D7; B4/C5). The winners of these four battles will go on to two battles and finally will be one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place.

If there is less than 10 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 4 dancers, one of each class and then there are only 2 battles (A1/D4 and B2/C3); followed by battles of the winners of previous 2 battles (one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place).

TEAM

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams may use their own music in the first round. Organizer ’s music will be used from 2nd round.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
    • Ragga
    • R&B
    • House
    • D.step
    • Popping
  3. always OLD SCHOOL

team BATTLES

 

1st round

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. and 1/2. place

1.

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

4.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

5.

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD
  1. Duration of Performance: 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) in first round (Show). The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will have up to 5 entries (different styles). The “Final-Battle” up to 7 entries (different styles).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Stage props are allowed in hip hop battle teams.
  4. If one team disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.

Based on the first round results, the Chairman of Judges will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked teams an d the 3rd – 4th ranked teams.

All other rules are as outlined under SOLO. Procedure of HipHop Battle Team competition:

First round is a show of teams who will dance to their own music. Judges must be aware that teams are presenting at least 2 different styles. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best teams. The Adjudicators give the best team 4 points (A), the next best team 3 points(B), the next best team 2 points(C) and the next best team 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best teams will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 teams in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for team/teams on the next position after 4 best teams (cross means placement).

If the time frame allows, Organizer Chairman and Supervisor can decide, to use the big spider (as Solos), so there go 8 or 16 teams into the battles.

ACROBATIC DANCE

The categories of Acrobatic/ Gymnastic Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Characteristics and Movement: Acrobatic dance shall include many techniques, such as tumbling, balancing, contortions, and aerial tricks without hands and controlled movement, as well as acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand support elements, turns, rolls, walkovers and saltos, all of which should be connected with dance movement and dance combinations. The emphasis is on strength, stretch, control and ease of movement, no matter what technique is being used. It is forbidden to form routine on the basic Aerobic and sport Rock’ n ’Roll ­elements. For safety reasons it is forbidden in all age divisions: · To perform supports/lifts higher than dancers’ height as well as different throws from hands of other dancer except in the adult division. · To fall on the knees, stomach and back from the jumping position; · To begin an acrobatic walkover within flight phase; – To perform any acrobatic element more than three times (variations are allowed i.e. performance of different forms of the element. For example: cartwheel, one hand cartwheel, cartwheel with transition to the floor, elbow cartwheel etc.). · To perform headstand (head balance).

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE:

Arabic folk dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Recommended Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Falaahii · Baladi Shaabi (used only for children vocals) · Muashahat · Bandari · Simsimiya (Bambuti) · Bedouin Not recommended for children Style: · Moroccan · Iraqi · Tunisian (because there are movements of after wedding ceremony) · Algerian · Iranian · Shamadan · Eskandarani · ritual dances and other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style For example: Sticks for Saidi… Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the organizer the dance style, they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.

4.1 Time Limits: ORIENTAL DANCE SOLO Preliminaries, 1/8, 1/16, etc. Organizer’s Music 1 minute all together – 1 minute improvisation in a group of 4-6 1 minute all together 10-12 ¼ and Semi-final own music 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, ORIENTAL SHOW DANCE (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATION Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes

4.2 Length of Solo parts in categories: Note: In Duo, Group, Formation it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. 5. Rules for the Costume

5.1 Oriental Dance Costume may consist of – Special integral dress – Long skirt and traditional or stylized top over a tricot – Pantaloons or leggins worn with a long skirt Children should be encouraged to dress like children and not like teens and adults. Dancers in the children’s division may never appear nude, so that cosume should be integral and must not distort body natural for this age. Limits: – Rather shallow neckline (not allowed deep decollete) – Covered shoulders (costume must have sleeves of any length) – Slit must not be higher than knee – All dancers in the children division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace, but NOT skin colored) Prohibited: – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but the same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves and to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Intimate parts of body (bust, buttock and pubic area) must be covered with cloth materials or must have a lining (not skin colored)

5.2 Oriental Folk Costume must correspond to the chosen dance style. It must also correspond to general limits of children’s costume

5.3 Oriental Show Costume can be of any type but it must correspond to general limits of children’s costumes Prohibited: – Costume materials that suggest sexual, deviate, sadomasochistic or other adult themes – Deep neckline – All dancers in the children’s division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace materials, but NOT skin colored) – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but he same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves ot to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Allowed: – Mini skirts and shorts if it is required by the image. In this case, the costume must fit in way to cover the intimate parts of the dancer´s body (buttock and pubic area) during all the performance – Light make-up, if it is required by the image

  1. Choreography and Image Children should appear as children and not as teens and adults. Their image, music and choreography should be appropriate to the children’s age division. Children’s costumes, hair and make-up must be age appropriate and not distort the age of the child. It is possible to use make-up in Oriental Show Dance discipline to bring out the features of the face or to portray a character. In other Oriental dance disciplines it is prohibited to use make-up.
  2. In the Children’s Age Division it is forbidden to: – use a parter in Oriental dance discipline, while it is allowed in Oriental Folk and Oriental Show disciplines, if it is required by the image – use sharp cutting devices (knives, swords, etc.), if they are not dummy – the extensively executed shimmy movement in standing and walking positions is allowed not more than 4 bars – Use make-up (except Oriental Show ,

BREAK DANCE

The categories of Break Dance are: Solo and Crews. Starting January 1st, 2018 the categories of Break Dance are: Solo Female, Solo Male (B-Boys and B-Girls) and Crews (ADM 2017, Implementation 1.1.2018, no change possible before 2021) Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines. Break Dance is for Juniors and Adults only SOLO 1. Music: Organizer’s music in Break Dance style.

  1. Duration of Performance: Preliminary round: 2 minutes divided into three sections of 40 seconds duration each. Additional opening minute of the 1st round is not evaluated. In the preliminary round, there must be no more than three (3) competitors dancing together. The Chairperson of Adjudicators determines the number of competitors in the opening minute and final 40 seconds in the preliminary round. The best 16 competitors fight in “battles” one by one in a “knock-out-system” (5 – 10 minutes each battle).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Typical Break Dance Elements: Crown, Headspin, Backspin, Turtle, Helicopter, Windmill, Bailey Windmill, Uprock, Freeze, Sixstep, One Hand Up, Swipe, Atomic, Flair, Holoback, Traxx, 99, variable footwork, etc., including different variations of these figures, elements and movements. Keen ‘breaks’ (stopping of movement), isolations, breaking movements, plus acrobatic movements in various combinations are all expected aspects of Break Dance routines. Technical difficulty of performed elements, joining of elements (flowing acrobatic movements melding into one another), originality, etc. are all highly important, and the entire presentation will be evaluated NOTE: It is important to show more than two different figures and elements. Figures danced twice are only counted once. If repeated, the best attempt of the two will be marked.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions for Street Dance.
  5. Forbidden Movements: Elements and figures that, according to the dancer’s ability, are too difficult or that could lead to injuries or loss of life.
  6. Stage Props: As applicable for this discipline. For Teams it is also allowed to use requisites. 8. Break Dance competitions are not organized in the Children age division. 9. Procedure of Break Dance solo competition a. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute ‘warm up’ performance, which the Adjudicators do not evaluate. They then dance (not more than 3) first 40 seconds period. When all dancers finish, they start to perform the 2nd period of 40 seconds in the same order. The final performance gives the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor during the final presentations. Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).

QUALIFICATION: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round, Adjudicators should qualify the best 16. In the first round, the Adjudicators evaluate each dancer with the points from 1 to 10. Criteria for the points are:

  • bad- none of the elements are performed in correct way, out of music
  • 2- bad- one or two elements are performed correct but out of music
  • 3- not bad- dancer is performing weak, choreography is poor
  • 4- not bad- dancer is performing various elements or style
  • 5- satisfactory- dancer is performing various elements or style, but there is no fluidity or is repeating the same element two or more time
  • 6- good- dancer is performing various elements and style, there is not enough power or image is poor
  • 7- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but with the small mistakes
  • 8- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but losing the power
  • 9- excellent- dancer is using different styles and performing various elements on a very high level
  • 10- outstanding- dancer is using different styles, performing various elements and bringing personal note in performance Following the given points Adjudicators will give A, B, C, D letters and additionally X’s, for those that they want into the next round. The Scrutineers count each given letter with the points. The points are given in the following manner: A- 4 points, B- 3 points, C- 2 points, D- 1 point. The cross is counted as 0.5 point. The dancers are sorted out for the next round (spider) by the total amount of points that comes from the given letters and crosses. In case of tie the Scrutineer will use the following rule for the start numbers in tie: first, the number of letters will be counted (C and D for one start number is better than B) and if the tie cannot be broken the given points from all Adjudicators (1-10) will be used in order to select the dancers for the next round. If it is not possible to select the start numbers for the next round after procedure explained in 1 and 2, then the actual redance will be organized by giving the points from 1-10 and letters that are needed for the next round.
  1. BATTLES: In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor Adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairperson of Adjudicators) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All Adjudicators´ decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the Chairperson of Adjudicators.) If there is no clear majority in the break dance battles (crossed arms), one more round (one entrance of each) will be done. After the additional round (entrance), Adjudicators have to clearly decide about their choice, showing the hand to the dancer they would like to see as a winner. Adjudicators have to use the given Adjudicators sheet who they would like to see in the next round. The Adjudicators then show the hand to a dancer following the judging sheet. The Chairperson and Scrutineer control the showing of hands.

 

CREW BATTLES

 

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams = Crews may use their own music in the first round. Organizer’s music in Break Dance Style will be used in the final round.
  3. Duration of Performance in the first round (Show): 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) of each team’s/crew´s performance may be danced using the team’s/ crew´s music. In case that the music is too long or short the crew will be disqualified. The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will last about 5 – 10 minutes. The “Final-Battle” 10 – 15 (20) minutes, according to the Supervisors decision. The last minute will be announced.
  4. Tempo: No restrictions.
  5. Typical Break Dance Elements: Same as for Break Dance Solos, plus: Acrobatics should have some style continuation. Choreography for the exhibition to the team’s own music must be a clear performance of a team, not just a demonstration of unrelated solo performances. Musicality, difficulty of movements and figures, originality and team variability will all be highly evaluated. Synchronized movements, shadow standing, mirror positions and smooth transitions of these components from one into another, along with choreographic variability and work with space will also be evaluated. All typical elements of Break Dance should be performed – Styles – Pop Locking – Power moves – Electric Boogie.
  6. If one crew disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.
  7. The final ‘battle’ portion of each contest shall consist of individual performances of dancers from the competing crews in which each dancer must dance his or her solo part at least one time, and the crew´s performance will be Adjudicatord as a whole.
  8. Based on the first round results, the Chairperson of Adjudicators will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked crews and the 3rd – 4th ranked crews.
  9. All other rules are as outlined under Break Dance Solo.
  10. Procedure of Break Dance Team competition First round is a show of crews who will dance to their own music. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best crews. The Adjudicators give the best crew 4 points (A), the next best crew 3 points (B), the next best crew 2 points (C) and the next best crew 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best crews will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 crews in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairperson of Adjudicators may decide to ask for additional crosses for crew/crews on the next position after 4 best crews (cross means placement). Special note for Break Dance and Electric Boogie: When asked to select Adjudicators for this discipline, each nation should only invite Adjudicators who are very experienced in Break Dance and Electric Boogie. This type of VIP Adjudicator would include past champions, celebrity performers, teachers and choreographers who are all considered experts in this field. This note is intended as a guideline only, and is not a rule.

 

ELECTRIC BOOGIE

The categories of Electric Boogie are: Solo, Duo. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer ’s music 1 minute in all rounds, including the final round.
  2. Tempo: Solos 30-32,5 bars per minute (120-130 beats per minute). Duos 31-32,5 bars p.M. (124-130 bpm)
  3. Typical Movements and Techniques: Sharp electric movements that flow into waves, isolations, robot, pantomime elements, popping, animation, electric shock, walking, puppet, ticking, locking, etc. It is important to show more than two different techniques and movements.
  4. The dancer(s) should endeavor to create illusions in his or her performance to surprise and ‘electrify’ the audience.
  5. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adults Duos.
  6. Stage Props: are allowed, such as masks, glasses, hats etc. – but NO requisites!! Each group of competitors begins with a one-minute performance, dancing together in each round. They then dance three, two or one by one for their one-minute performance or 1 minute performance in the final round. Each group dances a final minute together in each round. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations. Both the opening and final performance give the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers.
STREET DANCE: 

BREAK DANCE

The categories of Break Dance are: Solo and Crews. Starting January 1st, 2018 the categories of Break Dance are: Solo Female, Solo Male (B-Boys and B-Girls) and Crews (ADM 2017, Implementation 1.1.2018, no change possible before 2021) Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines. Break Dance is for Juniors and Adults only SOLO 1. Music: Organizer’s music in Break Dance style.

  1. Duration of Performance: Preliminary round: 2 minutes divided into three sections of 40 seconds duration each. Additional opening minute of the 1st round is not evaluated. In the preliminary round, there must be no more than three (3) competitors dancing together. The Chairperson of Adjudicators determines the number of competitors in the opening minute and final 40 seconds in the preliminary round. The best 16 competitors fight in “battles” one by one in a “knock-out-system” (5 – 10 minutes each battle).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Typical Break Dance Elements: Crown, Headspin, Backspin, Turtle, Helicopter, Windmill, Bailey Windmill, Uprock, Freeze, Sixstep, One Hand Up, Swipe, Atomic, Flair, Holoback, Traxx, 99, variable footwork, etc., including different variations of these figures, elements and movements. Keen ‘breaks’ (stopping of movement), isolations, breaking movements, plus acrobatic movements in various combinations are all expected aspects of Break Dance routines. Technical difficulty of performed elements, joining of elements (flowing acrobatic movements melding into one another), originality, etc. are all highly important, and the entire presentation will be evaluated NOTE: It is important to show more than two different figures and elements. Figures danced twice are only counted once. If repeated, the best attempt of the two will be marked.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions for Street Dance.
  5. Forbidden Movements: Elements and figures that, according to the dancer’s ability, are too difficult or that could lead to injuries or loss of life.
  6. Stage Props: As applicable for this discipline. For Teams it is also allowed to use requisites. 8. Break Dance competitions are not organized in the Children age division. 9. Procedure of Break Dance solo competition a. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute ‘warm up’ performance, which the Adjudicators do not evaluate. They then dance (not more than 3) first 40 seconds period. When all dancers finish, they start to perform the 2nd period of 40 seconds in the same order. The final performance gives the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor during the final presentations. Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).

QUALIFICATION: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round, Adjudicators should qualify the best 16. In the first round, the Adjudicators evaluate each dancer with the points from 1 to 10. Criteria for the points are:

  • bad- none of the elements are performed in correct way, out of music
  • 2- bad- one or two elements are performed correct but out of music
  • 3- not bad- dancer is performing weak, choreography is poor
  • 4- not bad- dancer is performing various elements or style
  • 5- satisfactory- dancer is performing various elements or style, but there is no fluidity or is repeating the same element two or more time
  • 6- good- dancer is performing various elements and style, there is not enough power or image is poor
  • 7- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but with the small mistakes
  • 8- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but losing the power
  • 9- excellent- dancer is using different styles and performing various elements on a very high level
  • 10- outstanding- dancer is using different styles, performing various elements and bringing personal note in performance Following the given points Adjudicators will give A, B, C, D letters and additionally X’s, for those that they want into the next round. The Scrutineers count each given letter with the points. The points are given in the following manner: A- 4 points, B- 3 points, C- 2 points, D- 1 point. The cross is counted as 0.5 point. The dancers are sorted out for the next round (spider) by the total amount of points that comes from the given letters and crosses. In case of tie the Scrutineer will use the following rule for the start numbers in tie: first, the number of letters will be counted (C and D for one start number is better than B) and if the tie cannot be broken the given points from all Adjudicators (1-10) will be used in order to select the dancers for the next round. If it is not possible to select the start numbers for the next round after procedure explained in 1 and 2, then the actual redance will be organized by giving the points from 1-10 and letters that are needed for the next round.
  1. BATTLES: In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor Adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairperson of Adjudicators) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All Adjudicators´ decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the Chairperson of Adjudicators.) If there is no clear majority in the break dance battles (crossed arms), one more round (one entrance of each) will be done. After the additional round (entrance), Adjudicators have to clearly decide about their choice, showing the hand to the dancer they would like to see as a winner. Adjudicators have to use the given Adjudicators sheet who they would like to see in the next round. The Adjudicators then show the hand to a dancer following the judging sheet. The Chairperson and Scrutineer control the showing of hands.

 

CREW BATTLES

 

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams = Crews may use their own music in the first round. Organizer’s music in Break Dance Style will be used in the final round.
  3. Duration of Performance in the first round (Show): 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) of each team’s/crew´s performance may be danced using the team’s/ crew´s music. In case that the music is too long or short the crew will be disqualified. The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will last about 5 – 10 minutes. The “Final-Battle” 10 – 15 (20) minutes, according to the Supervisors decision. The last minute will be announced.
  4. Tempo: No restrictions.
  5. Typical Break Dance Elements: Same as for Break Dance Solos, plus: Acrobatics should have some style continuation. Choreography for the exhibition to the team’s own music must be a clear performance of a team, not just a demonstration of unrelated solo performances. Musicality, difficulty of movements and figures, originality and team variability will all be highly evaluated. Synchronized movements, shadow standing, mirror positions and smooth transitions of these components from one into another, along with choreographic variability and work with space will also be evaluated. All typical elements of Break Dance should be performed – Styles – Pop Locking – Power moves – Electric Boogie.
  6. If one crew disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.
  7. The final ‘battle’ portion of each contest shall consist of individual performances of dancers from the competing crews in which each dancer must dance his or her solo part at least one time, and the crew´s performance will be Adjudicatord as a whole.
  8. Based on the first round results, the Chairperson of Adjudicators will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked crews and the 3rd – 4th ranked crews.
  9. All other rules are as outlined under Break Dance Solo.
  10. Procedure of Break Dance Team competition First round is a show of crews who will dance to their own music. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best crews. The Adjudicators give the best crew 4 points (A), the next best crew 3 points (B), the next best crew 2 points (C) and the next best crew 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best crews will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 crews in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairperson of Adjudicators may decide to ask for additional crosses for crew/crews on the next position after 4 best crews (cross means placement). Special note for Break Dance and Electric Boogie: When asked to select Adjudicators for this discipline, each nation should only invite Adjudicators who are very experienced in Break Dance and Electric Boogie. This type of VIP Adjudicator would include past champions, celebrity performers, teachers and choreographers who are all considered experts in this field. This note is intended as a guideline only, and is not a rule.

 

ELECTRIC BOOGIE

The categories of Electric Boogie are: Solo, Duo. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer ’s music 1 minute in all rounds, including the final round.
  2. Tempo: Solos 30-32,5 bars per minute (120-130 beats per minute). Duos 31-32,5 bars p.M. (124-130 bpm)
  3. Typical Movements and Techniques: Sharp electric movements that flow into waves, isolations, robot, pantomime elements, popping, animation, electric shock, walking, puppet, ticking, locking, etc. It is important to show more than two different techniques and movements.
  4. The dancer(s) should endeavor to create illusions in his or her performance to surprise and ‘electrify’ the audience.
  5. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adults Duos.
  6. Stage Props: are allowed, such as masks, glasses, hats etc. – but NO requisites!! Each group of competitors begins with a one-minute performance, dancing together in each round. They then dance three, two or one by one for their one-minute performance or 1 minute performance in the final round. Each group dances a final minute together in each round. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations. Both the opening and final performance give the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers.

HIP HOP

The categories of Hip Hop are:

Solo male, Solo female, Duo, Small Group and Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO MALE, SOLO FEMALE AND DUO

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer’s music 1 minute.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute) (downbeat, more groove).
  3. Characteristics and Movement: Hip-Hop includes different new dance styles, such as Hype Dance, New-Jack- Swing, Jamming, etc., adding creative elements such as stops, jokes, flashes, swift movements, etc. Some Electric Boogie movements can be performed but should not dominate. Hip-Hop is mostly danced on the eighth notes with a typical bounce, or jumping action (New- Jack-Swing).
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  7. Special Note for Duos: Both dancers should dance together, not only for themselves or one by one. Their performance should include synchronized steps such as Follow the Leader, shadow and mirror design, as well as patterns and dancing the same steps. A mixture of all possibilities is important.

Procedure of Competition: In each round the dancers perform three (3) times. Each group of competitors begins and ends with a one-minute performance dancing together in each round. Number of dancers on the floor in subsequent rounds during second minute of performance is specified in the Section 3.12.2 General Rules & Regulations for Competitions.

Both opening and final minutes are to give the Judges an opportunity to compare dancers.

To avoid any risk of injuries Judges shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations.

SMALL GROUPS

  1. Length of Exhibition: Organizer ?s music 2 minutes.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute), downbeat, groove.
  3. Dancers of each group dance together, two or three at a time. In final round they perform one by one.
  4. Musicality, (rhythm, breaks), dance variety and originality, together with well-done and well- performed stage and individual choreography, will be highly evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of music, dance and costume, which should underline the special Hip-Hop character.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).
  7. Groups will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not control / dominate.
  8. All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo.

FORMATIONS

  1. Formations dance to their own music.
  2. Length of Exhibition: 2 minutes&30 seconds minimum to 3 minutes maximum.
  3. Tempo for Hip Hop Formation cannot be more than 30 bars per minute (120 beats), there is no limit down. However, it is allowed to be out of this tempo range for a maximum of 30 seconds.
  4. Music: Must be typically Hip Hop as it is currently known in the Hip Hop scene, including break beats.
  5. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not dominate.
  6. Lifts: Permitted only in junior and adult formation.
  7. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).

All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo & Small Group. 

HIP HOP BATTLES

The categories of Hip Hop Battles are:

Solo and Teams.
Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO

Music:

  1. Organizer’s music in different Hip Hop styles.
  2. Duration of Performance: 4-6 entries, each 0:30-1:00 min.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
  • Ragga
  • R&B
  • House
  • D.step
  • Popping

3. always OLD SCHOOL

solo BATTLES

 

1st round

1/8 final

1/4 final

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. place

Battle 1/2. place

1.

1:00 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

4.

1:00 OLD

——

——

——

——

——

5.

——

——

——

——

——

——

  1. Tempo:

No restrictions, but very different because of the different styles

  1. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  2. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  3. Procedure of HipHop Solo Battle competition:
    1. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors (heats) begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute performance in “New Style”, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor.. Then they dance 2 times 30-40 seconds in some other Style: Ragga or R&B or House or D. Step or Popping or others, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor. The final performance is “Old School”, again one minute.The Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).
    2. Qualification: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round,adjudicatorsshouldqualify the best 16, which they divide into 4 classes/categories (A=best, B=2nd best, C=3rd best, D=4th best). For those whom they want to qualify, they use the following point system. The adjudicator gives the best 4 dancers 4 points(A), the next best 4 dancers 3 points(B), the next best 4 dancers 2 points(C) and the next best dancers 1 point(D) each. For those whom they do not want to qualify they give no points. According to achieved summary of points the RANKING of the 16 best dancers is made, in which first four dancers belong to A class, 4 next to B class, 4 next to C class and 4 to D class. If there are more than 20competitors in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for dancers on first next position after 16 best dancers (cross means placement on the 17th position and is taken into consideration in case of tie).

c. BATTLES:

In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairman of Judges) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All adjudicators ? decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the chairman of judges.

Ranking after the 1st round:

1A 5B 9C 13D

2A 6B 10C 14D

3A 7B 11C 15D

4A 8B 12C 16D

 If there is 10 to 17 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 8 dancers, 2 of class A (4 points), 2 of class B (3 points), 2 of class C (2 points), and 2 of class D (1 point). Then in next round there are only 4 battles (A1/D8; B3/C6; A2/D7; B4/C5). The winners of these four battles will go on to two battles and finally will be one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place.

If there is less than 10 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 4 dancers, one of each class and then there are only 2 battles (A1/D4 and B2/C3); followed by battles of the winners of previous 2 battles (one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place).

TEAM

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams may use their own music in the first round. Organizer ’s music will be used from 2nd round.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
    • Ragga
    • R&B
    • House
    • D.step
    • Popping
  3. always OLD SCHOOL

team BATTLES

 

1st round

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. and 1/2. place

1.

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

4.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

5.

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD
  1. Duration of Performance: 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) in first round (Show). The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will have up to 5 entries (different styles). The “Final-Battle” up to 7 entries (different styles).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Stage props are allowed in hip hop battle teams.
  4. If one team disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.

Based on the first round results, the Chairman of Judges will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked teams an d the 3rd – 4th ranked teams.

All other rules are as outlined under SOLO. Procedure of HipHop Battle Team competition:

First round is a show of teams who will dance to their own music. Judges must be aware that teams are presenting at least 2 different styles. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best teams. The Adjudicators give the best team 4 points (A), the next best team 3 points(B), the next best team 2 points(C) and the next best team 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best teams will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 teams in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for team/teams on the next position after 4 best teams (cross means placement).

If the time frame allows, Organizer Chairman and Supervisor can decide, to use the big spider (as Solos), so there go 8 or 16 teams into the battles.

DISCO DANCE

DISCO DANCE - FREE STYLE

STREET DANCE SHOW

DISCO SHOW

COUPLE DANCE DISCIPLINES: 

ARGENTINE TANGO (TANGO SALON, TANGO MILONGA, TANGOVALS AND TANGOESCENARIO)

SALSA

MERANGUE

BACHATA

CARIBBEAN DANCES

SALSA RUEDA DE CASINO TEAMS AND FORMATIONS

CARIBBEAN SHOW

LATIN SHOW

Characteristics and movements:

When we talk about Latin music in dance styles such as rumba and samba, we do NOT expect Latin American sport dance styles and movements. We expect to see authentic rumba, authentic samba, carnival samba, etc. One of the many original dance styles is required, NOT the 5 IDSF Latin-American dances. The performances are in Latin style and they are danced on any Latin music chosen by the contestants. Options include: salsa, bachata, merengue, son or other Latin-inspired music. Costumes can be Carnival, African , futuristic , street , Caribbean or any combination of these styles or other styles suitable for performing the dance/s. The presentation may be in any form or combination of two or more different styles, including theatrical motions. The performance and costumes should not resemble the ones used in IDSF competitions in Latin-American dances.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of dances and figures, originality, overall presentation and individual choreography are all elements contestants are evaluated on. It is very important to present the harmony between the idea, music, dance, choreography, costumes and props, because the overall image of the team performances in the Latin show is evaluated.

Acrobatic moves:

Permitted.

Lifts:

NOT permitted in the child category, but are allowed in other categories.

Stage props:

All stage props are allowed under the condition that the contestants can bring it/them with one entrance of the dancing area.

MALE/ FEMALE SOLO

Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 seconds; Number of dancers: 1

DUO / Couples Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds up to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 secondsБрой танцьори: 2

SMALL GROUPS

Duration of the presentation:

A min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 3 minutes

Number of dancers:

3-7

FORMATIONS

Duration of the presentation:

a min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 4 minutes;

Number of dancers:

8-24

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 4D system.

COUPLE DANCE FORMATIONS

SYNCHRO DANCE

OTHER DISCIPLINES: 

PRODUCTION

MTV DANCE

Characteristics:

This is a mixture of different dance styles and new creative choreographies inspired by MTV’s tradition. All techniques are allowed.

Music:

Each group selects the music it will dance to. All kinds of musical rhythms are eligible and dancers can compete in the MTV dance competitions.

Duration of the performance:

2:30 to 3:00 minutes for small groups / 3:00 to 4:00 minutes for formations

Tempo:

No restrictions

Characteristics and movements:

Canon and floor movements are allowed. The movements can emphasize the femininity and coquettishness of the female performers slightly – for example: Burlesque show. In MTV style (music videos) a number of well assessed acrobatics must be used. Stage props are allowed. Various compositions in the choreographies such as:  re-positioning, mismatching and other various dance figures are encouraged. All dance techniques are allowed.

Lifts / supports:

All are permitted (except in the children’s age categories).

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 3D system.

K – POP / Korean pop dance/

MUSIC WITH SINGING LIVE

MUSIC DANCE

MAJORETTE DANCES

MAJORETTE SHOW DANCES

CHEERLEADING

Parades, performances and SPORT dances

If there is interest in this particular style we will send you the required information.

OTHER DANCE

ZUMBA

ZUMBA SHOW

REPRESENTATIVE DANCES

Dance compositions bearing the folklore nature of various nationalities and all theatrical dances of the peoples standing on the academic principles and requirements of the ballet and dance performance: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, modern interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc.. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should match the nature of the nationality.

The following is allowed:
The use of props appropriate to the nature of the nationality;

The following is not allowed:
the use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life endangering props on stage; Performance CANNOT use the same costume for two different dances.

Acrobatic moves 
are allowed, but only if they are key to the characteristics of the national dance. A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points.

Supports no allowed 
for children in the age category of 11 years. “Support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air.

Supports are only allowed 
if it is an essential characteristics of the national dance (no children under age 11 years is allowed to do supports). A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points. Note: BELLY DANCE and Latin shows are not allowed. 
The duration of the dance is recommended!
• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Small group – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.• Formation – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.

The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is 2:30 to 3:00 min.

Measurement of time:
From the initial position or entry of the performers on stage to the last position and exit.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 3D system. All finals are in Skating system.

ETHNO SHOW

Characteristics and Movements:
All national dances are included: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should be appropriate to the nature of the image depicted by the performance. The use of props is allowed. All props are allowed under the condition that they can be imported and exported by the performer in one entrance on stage.
Note: LATIN and BELLY DANCE SHOWs are not allowed.
The Ethno show allows the use of supports (excluding the infant age group) (“support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air) acrobatics and other theatrical effects.The use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life-threatening props as well as dance-area-polluting objects are not allowed on stage! The same costume could not be used for two different dances. Supports are prohibited in the age category of children up to 11 years.An ETHNO show must always have direction, storyline and subtle concept for the public’s amusement.

The duration of the dance is recommended!

• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.

• Small groups – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.
• Formations – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.
The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is a minimum of 2:30 up to a maximum of 3:00 min.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 4D system.

LATIN SHOW

Characteristics and movements:

When we talk about Latin music in dance styles such as rumba and samba, we do NOT expect Latin American sport dance styles and movements. We expect to see authentic rumba, authentic samba, carnival samba, etc. One of the many original dance styles is required, NOT the 5 IDSF Latin-American dances. The performances are in Latin style and they are danced on any Latin music chosen by the contestants. Options include: salsa, bachata, merengue, son or other Latin-inspired music. Costumes can be Carnival, African , futuristic , street , Caribbean or any combination of these styles or other styles suitable for performing the dance/s. The presentation may be in any form or combination of two or more different styles, including theatrical motions. The performance and costumes should not resemble the ones used in IDSF competitions in Latin-American dances.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of dances and figures, originality, overall presentation and individual choreography are all elements contestants are evaluated on. It is very important to present the harmony between the idea, music, dance, choreography, costumes and props, because the overall image of the team performances in the Latin show is evaluated.

Acrobatic moves:

Permitted.

Lifts:

NOT permitted in the child category, but are allowed in other categories.

Stage props:

All stage props are allowed under the condition that the contestants can bring it/them with one entrance of the dancing area.

MALE/ FEMALE SOLO

Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 seconds; Number of dancers: 1

DUO / Couples Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds up to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 secondsБрой танцьори: 2

SMALL GROUPS

Duration of the presentation:

A min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 3 minutes

Number of dancers:

3-7

FORMATIONS

Duration of the presentation:

a min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 4 minutes;

Number of dancers:

8-24

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 4D system.

ACROBATIC/GYMNASTIC DANCE

Characteristics and Movements:

The Acrobatic dance must include a lot of techniques, e.g.: acrobatics, balance, twisting of the body. Air hands-free figures, controlled movements and acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand supports, turns, somersault. All of them must be connected with dance moves and dance combinations. Emphasis is on strength, elasticity, control and ease of implementation, no matter what technique is being used is key.

A dance based on aerobics or sport Rock and Roll is not allowed.

In regards to the safety, it is prohibited:

• To perform supports / lifts at height bigger than the dancer’s height, as well as various hand throws of the other dancer;

• To fall on knees, stomach or back from a jumping position;

• To begin an acrobatic number from a “flight” phase;

• To perform any acrobatic element for more than three times (only variations are permitted; for example: various forms of presentation of an element – for instance, one hand wheels, wheel with a transition to the ground, elbow wheel, etc.)

Lifts, pyramids, releases:

• Lifts are permitted in the age groups of youth and adults.

• The pyramids are permitted in the age groups “youth” and “adults”. The pyramid is an element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It represents a group position in which the dancers, supporting one another, form a complex figure. During the performance the pyramid should stay fixed for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

• In the age group of young, high pyramids without assistance are prohibited.

• In the age groups of children and young people various throws of one dancer from another are prohibited;

Clothing and decorative items:

The rules for the costumes are in the General Rules of IDO.

• In terms of safety, it is forbidden to wear decorative items like earrings, nose/tongue/belly button/face/skin piercings. Sunglasses, headphones and any decorations of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are prohibited. All decorations must be removed.

(Exceptions: decorations on dresses and temporary tattoos). All accessories, such as hair accessories must be securely fastened and, if possible, must be soft and flat. Long hair must be tied up and it should not conceal the face of the performer.

Stage props:

Stage props are authorized based on the Performing Arts rules and regulations.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements, originality of composition, harmony between design, music, choreography and acrobatic elements and the performance itself are highly valued.

MTV DANCE

Characteristics:

This is a mixture of different dance styles and new creative choreographies inspired by MTV’s tradition. All techniques are allowed.

Music:

Each group selects the music it will dance to. All kinds of musical rhythms are eligible and dancers can compete in the MTV dance competitions.

Duration of the performance:

2:30 to 3:00 minutes for small groups / 3:00 to 4:00 minutes for formations

Tempo:

No restrictions

Characteristics and movements:

Canon and floor movements are allowed. The movements can emphasize the femininity and coquettishness of the female performers slightly – for example: Burlesque show. In MTV style (music videos) a number of well assessed acrobatics must be used. Stage props are allowed. Various compositions in the choreographies such as:  re-positioning, mismatching and other various dance figures are encouraged. All dance techniques are allowed.

Lifts / supports:

All are permitted (except in the children’s age categories).

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 3D system.

CHEERLEADER DANCE

Parades, performances and SPORT dances

If there is interest in this particular style we will send you the required information.

MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY DANCE

The categories of Modern and Contemporary Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.
Modern dance is an artistic form with many styles that has undergone development over a relatively long period of time.
Modern dance is a more relaxed, free style of dance in which choreographer’s uses emotions and moods to design their own steps, in contrast to ballet’s structured code of steps. It has a deliberate use of gravity, whereas ballet strives to be light and airy
The development of modern dance was the logical consequence of the dancing styles that existed at the start of the 20th century, when the modern dancers of that period attempted to break free from established ballet forms, which they considered to be stiff, strict and restrictive and therefore they started searching for new trends and techniques to give dance a new direction.
This particular dance discipline concerns using modern dancing techniques that were created for the most part during the first half of the 20th century by renowned dance teachers and choreographers, /e.g. Martha Graham, Jos? Limon, Alvin Ailey, Merce Cunningham, Lester Horton and a host of others on the American continent, and Kurt Jooss, Mery Wigman, Hanya Holm and many others in Europe /
In view of the fact that all dance remains in a constant state of movement and development, this does not mean that we have to use only the aforementioned techniques in their original forms. On the contrary, it is also about using contemporary trends in modern dance techniques that either goes back to the foundations established by the aforementioned dance instructors or we can use totally new, experimental and original concepts for modern dance. Contemporary dance brings new informations about body and how the body works, offers new quality of movement, new shapes of body in area, brings new composition process and space for experiment.

Characteristics and Movement:

the entire routine must consist of modern dance techniques and current trends, and should correspond with age categories and the movement skills of the dancers.
Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Modern dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Modern dance performances.
The main point of assessment for this discipline will be the level of the dance movements carried out, as well as the theme and story line. The story, the building of a plot, is possible, but not so much emphasized here as, for example, for Show dance. It is primarily about pictures, moods.
In Modern Dance, a story, theme, idea or concept may be used but must always be in good taste for children, junior and adult situations, but human situations, especially those dealing with intimate or personal relationships should acceptable to viewing by all ages.

Acrobatics and Lifts:

Acrobatic movements are allowed. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions and are prohibited in the Children age division.

Props and Backgrounds:

Stage props are allowed to the extent that the stage setting for the choreography does not overshadow the dance itself. Backgrounds are prohibited.

Clothing:

Aesthetic, tasteful and age division appropriate.

JAZZ DANCE/LYRICAL

The categories of Jazz Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Primitive:

This dance form stemmed from early African Folk Dances that were done by slaves brought to America from Africa, West Indies, Cuba, Panama and Haiti.

Early:

Originated via the music of the late 1800’s and early 1900’s. Dances included the Two-Step or Cakewalk, and later became the Grizzly Bear, Bunny Hug, Turkey Trot, and Texas Tommy. This evolved into the fast music and dances of the 1920’s, the One-Step, Lindy Hop, Charleston and Black Bottom.

Musical Comedy / Theatre Jazz:

These forms of Jazz became very popular via movies / theatre during the 1930s and 1940s. Many dance forms were incorporated in Musical Comedy Jazz. Ballet with “On Your Toes”, and Modern Dance in “Oklahoma” and “Brigadoon”. During the 1950s and 1960s, dance became an integral part of telling the story in Musical Theatre, as illustrated in musicals such as “Flower Drum Song”, “Destry Rides Again”, “West Side Story” and “Seven Brides for Seven Brothers”. In 1978, the musical “Dancing” showed that the songs and books were secondary to the dancing; in fact, they are almost non-existent.

Contemporary:

Primarily performed to music of the day, it began in the late 1950s to the music of Contemporary Jazz musicians like Dizzy Gillespie, Art Tatum and Dave Brubeck.

Today’s Jazz Dance:

This discipline may be danced using many different styles and tempos, using themes based on Afro-Cuban, Oriental, Spanish or other national themes. It may be performed as a character, such as Cowboy, Sailor, Clown, etc. It may also be abstract in nature. Lyrical Jazz, performed to such music as Bette Midler’s “Wind Beneath My Wings”, may be included in Jazz Dance Discipline, as well as Modern Dance.

NOTE: Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Jazz Dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Jazz Dance performances.

Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Characteristics and Movement: Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Must: The entire routine must consist of Jazz work. Jazz technique, turns, jumps isolations, stretch, as well as use of port de bras, legs and upper body. Timing and rhythm will be considered in marking. Suitable footwear must be worn.

• Acrobatic Movements: In Jazz Dance limited acrobatics will be allowed as long as a body part is touching the floor, and does not dominate the routine.

• Lifts: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions in Adult and Junior divisions.

NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age divisions.

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

Clothing: All costume accessories, such as hats, scarves, gloves, belts, etc., may be worn if they are an integral part of the costume. They may be taken off, exchanged or discarded, but not left to litter the stage. Meaning, the dancer cannot leave the stage at the end of the routine leaving clothing behind. If a dancer discards or drops a scarf on the state, they must pick it up and take it off when they leave.

Hand Props: All hand props such as canes, umbrellas, hand bags, brief cases, mirrors, flags, etc., may be used as long as they are an integral part and used throughout the routine. They may be set down on the floor as long as it remains part of the routine and picked up when leaving the stage at the end of the routine. Hand props can never be used as floor props. In other words, you cannot enter the stage with an umbrella, set it on the floor, dance your entire routine without utilizing the umbrella and then pick it up at the end of the routine and leave the stage.

Floor Props: Necessary floor props such as a chair, stool, box, ladder, etc., may be carried on by a dancer in one trip, but must be an integral part of the routine and utilized throughout the entire performance. Items used to decorate or embellish the stage are not permitted. The dancer must carry the floor prop off the state at the end of the routine.

Scenic or stage props: Any items such as a scenic background, back drop, tree or other such prop, used to create a scene or embellish the stage are not permitted.

 Lip-sync is not allowed in Jazz Dance. 

Show Dance VS Jazz 

The difference between Show Dance and Jazz is very difficult, but not impossible, to define. Jazz Dance styles range from the early 1920s to the present, and most Jazz Dance pieces are created using pure dance without consideration to theme or story. This is an ever-evolving Performing Art dance, and one could very readily argue the point that all of the Street dances contain some elements of Jazz. How do we draw the line between Jazz and Street Dance? Definitely the music. The music dictates the style. Does that mean that Hip-Hop or Break Dance music cannot be used in a Jazz piece? No, because the style of the dance dictates what discipline it actually is.

Therefore, a Jazz Dance piece can be done to Hip-Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie music, but never a Hip- Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie to Jazz music. Since there is no specific style of music identifiable as Jazz Dance or Show Dance, music cannot be used to determine if the discipline is correct. However: the difference in styles can be used to make this determination.

Although Show Dance pieces may be based on a theme or story, there are many variables that exist. A Show Dance piece can be based on emotions, color and design, or even one word, such as ‘devastation’ or ‘jubilation.’ Jazz Dance does not have to convey any of the above criteria, and may be done based on pure dance only. For instance, a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ might be based on movement formation, color and costume. Another piece danced to the same or different music might be built on a theme of floating dancers, be enhanced by costume de- sign and originality, and feature terrific use of the music. Would a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ do well in a Jazz Dance competition? The answer to that would be in the eyes of the beholder, but a strong Jazz Dance piece would certainly give such a piece a run for its money if the former was not based on true Jazz technique.

Lyric or Modern may be the base technique for either Show Dance or Jazz Dance. It all depends on how much of a ‘show’ the piece really is. A straight lyric piece to Whitney Houston, without a theme or story line, would not do very well. Judging for IDO competitions is based on the ‘3 D’ system of separate evaluations for technique, composition and image. The show quality of the routine may enter into all three of these separate dimensions. The ability to use technique to enhance the theme or story being told is very important. The choreography and the way the dancer performs it must be of show quality, and the image that the dancer creates is also very important to the show value of a given piece. But judges should not be influenced by the show value of a Jazz Dance routine. Their marks for technique should be based purely on technique, choreography purely on choreography, and image marks should be based on the total look of the performer.

BALLET

The categories in Ballet are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Time limit is one (1) minute minimum for male and female solo variations, maximum 2:15 minutes. All other time limits see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Characteristics and Movement:

Classical Ballet is the most formal of the ballet styles; it adheres to traditional ballet technique. There are variations relating to area of origin, such as Russian ballet, French ballet, British ballet and Italian ballet. The Vaganova method, named after Agrippina Vaganova and the Cecchetti method, named after Enrico Cecchetti are Russian and Italian respectively and derive from the original French method. Classical ballet is best known for its unique features and techniques, such as pointe work, turn-out of the legs, and high extensions; its graceful, flowing, precise movements; and its ethereal qualities. This discipline must be performed using the Classical Ballet Technique and style and may be performed in soft ballet slippers or Pointe shoes. Although choreography may be of a modern nature, it may not deviate from what is commonly known as Classical Ballet. Lyric, Modern and Modern Jazz pieces may not be performed in this discipline. Pointe work is not allowed in the children’s category.

Acrobatic Movements:

Not permitted in the Ballet discipline.

Lifts:

Permitted (and encouraged) as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Any lifts used must remain in the Classical Ballet tradition, and may include drop-falls, supported turns and jumps resulting in catches. However, all dances are in a constant evolution and growth, so experimental and original choreography is encouraged.

Stage Props:

Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts but dancers cannot use cumber- some scenic material and must carry on and off the stage themselves in one trip.

HIP HOP

The categories of Hip Hop are:

Solo male, Solo female, Duo, Small Group and Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO MALE, SOLO FEMALE AND DUO

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer’s music 1 minute.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute) (downbeat, more groove).
  3. Characteristics and Movement: Hip-Hop includes different new dance styles, such as Hype Dance, New-Jack- Swing, Jamming, etc., adding creative elements such as stops, jokes, flashes, swift movements, etc. Some Electric Boogie movements can be performed but should not dominate. Hip-Hop is mostly danced on the eighth notes with a typical bounce, or jumping action (New- Jack-Swing).
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  7. Special Note for Duos: Both dancers should dance together, not only for themselves or one by one. Their performance should include synchronized steps such as Follow the Leader, shadow and mirror design, as well as patterns and dancing the same steps. A mixture of all possibilities is important.

Procedure of Competition: In each round the dancers perform three (3) times. Each group of competitors begins and ends with a one-minute performance dancing together in each round. Number of dancers on the floor in subsequent rounds during second minute of performance is specified in the Section 3.12.2 General Rules & Regulations for Competitions.

Both opening and final minutes are to give the Judges an opportunity to compare dancers.

To avoid any risk of injuries Judges shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations.

SMALL GROUPS

  1. Length of Exhibition: Organizer ?s music 2 minutes.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute), downbeat, groove.
  3. Dancers of each group dance together, two or three at a time. In final round they perform one by one.
  4. Musicality, (rhythm, breaks), dance variety and originality, together with well-done and well- performed stage and individual choreography, will be highly evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of music, dance and costume, which should underline the special Hip-Hop character.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).
  7. Groups will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not control / dominate.
  8. All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo.

FORMATIONS

  1. Formations dance to their own music.
  2. Length of Exhibition: 2 minutes&30 seconds minimum to 3 minutes maximum.
  3. Tempo for Hip Hop Formation cannot be more than 30 bars per minute (120 beats), there is no limit down. However, it is allowed to be out of this tempo range for a maximum of 30 seconds.
  4. Music: Must be typically Hip Hop as it is currently known in the Hip Hop scene, including break beats.
  5. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not dominate.
  6. Lifts: Permitted only in junior and adult formation.
  7. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).

All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo & Small Group. 

SHOW DANCE

The categories in Show Dance are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation.

Adult division duo is divided in two categories:

DUO female-female

DUO male-female or duo male-male
The dancer must only be represented in either two females, two males or male/female in any given competition Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. DEFINITION OF SHOW DANCEShow Dance in the broadest sense is based either on any Jazz/Lyrical, Ballet and/or Modern and Contemporary dance technique. Other dance disciplines can also be incorporated but cannot dominate. Ballroom, Latin or Rock ’n’ Roll (in the IDSF & WDC way) are excluded and cannot be performed. Show Dance allows the use of lifts (except for Children), acrobatics, props, lip-sync and other theatrical effects. An IDO Show Dance number always has to have a guideline, story or visible concept to entertain the audience.
  2. When movements and elements of other IDO dance disciplines such as Disco Dance, Hip-Hop, Electric Boogie, Break Dance and Tap, or when American & International Ballroom and Latin Dance is used in the performance, such movements / styles should not control / dominate the performance.
  3. The dancer’s personal interpretation should be clearly evident when using any of these disciplines or styles.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Acrobatic movements will be evaluated under show criteria and must never dominate and must be in harmony with the idea or theme. If modern gymnastic movements dominates a performance a significantly reduction of points in the technique dimension should be the consequence.
  5. Lifts: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age division.
  6. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.
  1. Musicality, variety of dance and patterns, originality, total performance and individual choreography will be evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of idea, music, dance, choreography, costume and props in the presentation, as the entire image will be used in evaluating the performance.
  2. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo, duo or ensemble parts may be performed, but must not dominate.
  3. All Show Dance presentations shall be based on a concept, story, theme or idea. There must be a title of the Show. The concept, story, theme or idea must be fully understandable and will be expressed by means of dance movements that adhere to the piece being presented, along with being creative, imaginative and original. The piece must have Show Value, as explained in the Judging Procedure (Section Protocol and Judging Procedure)

MINI PRODUCTIONS AND PRODUCTIONS

A Production is defined as an elaborate theatrical presentation, dominated by dance, which may include any IDO discipline or any combination thereof, using a story, theme, or concept. Since its primary purpose will be to entertain, it will be under the jurisdiction and administration of the Performing Arts Department.

Although all IDO disciplines will compete against each other in this category, specific rules as outlined under each discipline will be adhered to unless otherwise specified in the rules that follow.

Allowable DANCE FORMS:

This category will be open to all or any combination of dance disciplines under the auspices of the IDO. Dance disciplines under the control of the WDC, the IDSF and the WRRC may not participate in any IDO event unless special dispensation is given by the official organization representing that particular discipline.

AGE Limits:

There will be no age restrictions and all ages will compete against one another. No dancer will be represented in more than one Production at any event. However, dancers may participate in both Mini and Production, as long as the content of each performance is not duplicated.

Production CATEGORIES:

  • Large Productions – called “Productions”
  • Mini ProductionsTIME Limits:Large ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 5 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)Mini ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 3 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)STAGE PROPS and SCENERY:

There will be a total of 5 minutes to set up and 5 minutes to break down scenic sets, backdrop and stage props. All set ups and breakdowns must be made by stagehands provided by the school, club or group presenting the Production. Liquids or other substances that can litter, damage or make the dance floor/stage unsafe, may not be used. Both fire and working weapons are not permitted.

NUMBER of Performers:

Large Productions

At least 25 dancers minimum, with no maximum, are allowed in this category. However, it is the producer of the production’s responsibility to make sure the stage or dance floor is large enough to accommodate the number of dancers one wishes to present.

Mini Productions

At least 3 dancers minimum, with maximum of 12 dancers, are allowed in this category.

FEES:

Every performer appearing in the Production, including dancers, singers, and musicians, along with any other supporting cast must pay the start fee outlined in the IDO Rules Book. This is a lifetime license.

PRESENTATION:

A Production may include solo, duo and ensemble performers as long as long as solo and duo performers do not dominate the performance. Both lifts and/or acrobatic movements are allowed, as long as they do not threaten the well-being of the dancers. Other theatrical effects such as fog, laser lighting, magic and illusions may be presented, without restriction, provided they are not hazardous to the performers, stagehands or audience.

MUSIC:

All types of music may be used as long as it is not offensive to the public or IDO. Music containing inappropriate or offensive lyrics will not be permitted. Live music may be used as long as the musicians are part of the Production being presented.

LIVE MUSIC

  1. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine.
  2. The Organizer must be advised by email prior to 4 weeks preceding the event. The email MUST explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  3. All equipment must be brought in and set–up by the Dancers and/or Musicians.
  4. Set–up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  5. The set-up and break down of all equipment must not take more then 5 minutes.
  6. Live music AND recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music.For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems.
    1. House system – for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only.
    2. Additional portable amplification system supplied by the entrant for live music/vocals
    3. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music
  7. Suggested live music:
    Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums and percussion, bass, keyboards. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

Responsibility of the Organizer:

It is the Organizer’s responsibility to provide normal stage amenities as out- lined in the IDO Rules Book. The Organizer must provide equal opportunity for all productions. It is the full responsibility of the school, club, group or independent entry to supply all special effects, as well as the necessary stagehands for proper and safe operation. It is also their responsibility to check with the Organizers to make sure all special effects are allowed in the auditorium or competition facility.

HIP HOP BATTLES

The categories of Hip Hop Battles are:

Solo and Teams.
Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO

Music:

  1. Organizer’s music in different Hip Hop styles.
  2. Duration of Performance: 4-6 entries, each 0:30-1:00 min.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
  • Ragga
  • R&B
  • House
  • D.step
  • Popping

3. always OLD SCHOOL

solo BATTLES

 

1st round

1/8 final

1/4 final

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. place

Battle 1/2. place

1.

1:00 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

4.

1:00 OLD

——

——

——

——

——

5.

——

——

——

——

——

——

  1. Tempo:

No restrictions, but very different because of the different styles

  1. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  2. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  3. Procedure of HipHop Solo Battle competition:
    1. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors (heats) begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute performance in “New Style”, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor.. Then they dance 2 times 30-40 seconds in some other Style: Ragga or R&B or House or D. Step or Popping or others, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor. The final performance is “Old School”, again one minute.The Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).
    2. Qualification: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round,adjudicatorsshouldqualify the best 16, which they divide into 4 classes/categories (A=best, B=2nd best, C=3rd best, D=4th best). For those whom they want to qualify, they use the following point system. The adjudicator gives the best 4 dancers 4 points(A), the next best 4 dancers 3 points(B), the next best 4 dancers 2 points(C) and the next best dancers 1 point(D) each. For those whom they do not want to qualify they give no points. According to achieved summary of points the RANKING of the 16 best dancers is made, in which first four dancers belong to A class, 4 next to B class, 4 next to C class and 4 to D class. If there are more than 20competitors in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for dancers on first next position after 16 best dancers (cross means placement on the 17th position and is taken into consideration in case of tie).

c. BATTLES:

In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairman of Judges) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All adjudicators ? decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the chairman of judges.

Ranking after the 1st round:

1A 5B 9C 13D

2A 6B 10C 14D

3A 7B 11C 15D

4A 8B 12C 16D

 If there is 10 to 17 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 8 dancers, 2 of class A (4 points), 2 of class B (3 points), 2 of class C (2 points), and 2 of class D (1 point). Then in next round there are only 4 battles (A1/D8; B3/C6; A2/D7; B4/C5). The winners of these four battles will go on to two battles and finally will be one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place.

If there is less than 10 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 4 dancers, one of each class and then there are only 2 battles (A1/D4 and B2/C3); followed by battles of the winners of previous 2 battles (one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place).

TEAM

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams may use their own music in the first round. Organizer ’s music will be used from 2nd round.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
    • Ragga
    • R&B
    • House
    • D.step
    • Popping
  3. always OLD SCHOOL

team BATTLES

 

1st round

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. and 1/2. place

1.

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

4.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

5.

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD
  1. Duration of Performance: 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) in first round (Show). The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will have up to 5 entries (different styles). The “Final-Battle” up to 7 entries (different styles).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Stage props are allowed in hip hop battle teams.
  4. If one team disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.

Based on the first round results, the Chairman of Judges will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked teams an d the 3rd – 4th ranked teams.

All other rules are as outlined under SOLO. Procedure of HipHop Battle Team competition:

First round is a show of teams who will dance to their own music. Judges must be aware that teams are presenting at least 2 different styles. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best teams. The Adjudicators give the best team 4 points (A), the next best team 3 points(B), the next best team 2 points(C) and the next best team 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best teams will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 teams in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for team/teams on the next position after 4 best teams (cross means placement).

If the time frame allows, Organizer Chairman and Supervisor can decide, to use the big spider (as Solos), so there go 8 or 16 teams into the battles.

TAP DANCE

The categories of Tap Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Trio, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Although the primary emphasis should be on the harmonious blend of the dancer’s footwork (sound), many variables exist. All forms of tap will compete against each other, such as: Rhythm, Hoofing, Buck and Wing, Waltz Clog, Military, Precision Kick Line, Latin and Musical Theater. 2. Jingle taps, double taps or double claques are not permitted.
  2. The music must not contain prerecorded taps.
  3. Personal amplification devices are not permitted.
  4. No more than 30 seconds of a cappella or tacet (silence) may be used in any one routine. The absence of music must occur within the music and not at the beginning or end. “Stop Time” is an open part of a measure of music, not played but silent, with some notes being played. “A Capella” is an open phrase of multiple measures in length, but completely absent (silent) of any/all music.

NOTE: Music must be played at the beginning and end of the music and the A Capella must be no longer than 30 seconds. A Capella can also be defined as “Tacit.”

  1. The dancer’s taps and the music must be clearly audible to the audience and adjudicators. NOTE: The Organizer must make sure the stage has adequate floor microphones and speakers to make this possible.
  2. Acrobatic Movements that are an integral part of the routine are permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts, but will not enhance the dancer’s score. (see in General Rules restriction for Children, p.42)
  3. Regarding health and safety issues in Tap dance, it is not allowed to dance or perform toe work (dancing on pointe) in the Children’s age division for longer than one beat of music. The definition of this being dancing or standing on the tips of the toes in weight-bearing steps on one or both feet. Toe work/dancing on pointe will be for no longer than one beat of the music on one or both feet in Children’s Division. NOTE: No more than one beat and NO weight bearing pointe work at any time. This is stated strictly to clarify the rule already in effect

LIVE MUSIC during Junior and Adult Groups:

  1. This is a separate category and cannot be mixed with other categories.
  2. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine. The ages of the musicians are not relevant unless they are also dancers.
  3. The Organizer must be advised by email 4 weeks prior to the event. The email must explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  4. All equipment must be brought in and set up by the Dancers and/or musicians.
  5. Set up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  6. The set up and break down of the musical equipment and portable amplification must not take more than 3 minutes.
  7. Live music and recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music. For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems: a. House system for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only. b. The entrant may supply additional portable amplification system for live music/vocals. c. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music 8. Suggested live music: Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums, percussion, bass and keyboards may be used to make music. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

ACROBATIC DANCE

The categories of Acrobatic/ Gymnastic Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Characteristics and Movement: Acrobatic dance shall include many techniques, such as tumbling, balancing, contortions, and aerial tricks without hands and controlled movement, as well as acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand support elements, turns, rolls, walkovers and saltos, all of which should be connected with dance movement and dance combinations. The emphasis is on strength, stretch, control and ease of movement, no matter what technique is being used. It is forbidden to form routine on the basic Aerobic and sport Rock’ n ’Roll ­elements. For safety reasons it is forbidden in all age divisions: · To perform supports/lifts higher than dancers’ height as well as different throws from hands of other dancer except in the adult division. · To fall on the knees, stomach and back from the jumping position; · To begin an acrobatic walkover within flight phase; – To perform any acrobatic element more than three times (variations are allowed i.e. performance of different forms of the element. For example: cartwheel, one hand cartwheel, cartwheel with transition to the floor, elbow cartwheel etc.). · To perform headstand (head balance).

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

BOLLYWOOD

The categories of Bollywood are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Although Bollywood dance has its origins in Traditional Indian dance, it is made up of many differing dance styles including Indian Classical, Bhangra, Arabic, Folk, Tribal, Latino, Hip Hop, Street Dance, “Michael Jackson”, and many others.

We must, however, remember that in Bollywood there must be a contrast of dance styles and movement, depending on the music. It is important to use Lip Sync and Mime, to encourage enactment of some of the lyrics. This discipline must apply technique, grace, speed, style, versatility, body isolation, spatial awareness, energy, facial expression and emotion, whether solo, towards a partner or within a group. Many Bollywood dancers are also actors, so this skill needs to be shown.

MOVEMENT: We would expect to see much Indian dance influence, including Hand Gestures, Postures, Head Slides, Classical moves in arms, legs, feet, knee squats, etc., even within very Modern pieces.

COSTUME: This can be from Classical Indian (with or without ghunghroos/ankle bells) to a “Hoodie Look” to Futuristic, and even a mix, as long as it is in keeping with the dance style, music, Production piece, but still remain tasteful, and respect age.

FACIAL EXPRESSION: This is a very important part of Bollywood, so all parts of the face need to be worked. Eyes especially play an important part. Within this section we would expect to see Lip Sync, as well as many different emotions.

MAKE UP: Must be in keeping at all times, and must respect age. LIFTS & ACROBATICS: These may be included, again, as long as they are in keeping (although not expected). Lifts are not permitted for Children and Mini Kids. AGE: In Productions can be mix of all age divisions. PROPS & SCENERY: All exactly as Performing Arts. However, hand props such as a hand mirror, flowers, jewellery, etc., can play an important role in a performance.

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

CHARACTER / FOLK DANCE SHOW/ ETHNIC

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Character Dance pertains to dances portraying characters from traditional Ballets, Opera, Broadway style Musical Theatre, TV or Video. The range of characters is very broad and may include: The Wolf from Peter and the Wolf, Little Red Riding Hood, a Bird, Dog, Cat, Flower, Butterfly, Animal, Sailor, Nurse, Religious Preacher, Pauper, Prince or Shirley Temple. Costuming, music and dance movements must be appropriate to the character being presented.

Folk and Ethnic Dance: These disciplines must be Traditional Dances of any Nationality, passed down from generation to generation, and may include: Polonaise, Polynesian, American Indian, Highland Fling, Flamenco, Japanese Candle Dance, Hindu, Tarantella, African, etc. Traditional / authentic costuming and music is expected, and will be used in the total evaluation.

  1. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE:

Arabic folk dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Recommended Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Falaahii · Baladi Shaabi (used only for children vocals) · Muashahat · Bandari · Simsimiya (Bambuti) · Bedouin Not recommended for children Style: · Moroccan · Iraqi · Tunisian (because there are movements of after wedding ceremony) · Algerian · Iranian · Shamadan · Eskandarani · ritual dances and other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style For example: Sticks for Saidi… Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the organizer the dance style, they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.

4.1 Time Limits: ORIENTAL DANCE SOLO Preliminaries, 1/8, 1/16, etc. Organizer’s Music 1 minute all together – 1 minute improvisation in a group of 4-6 1 minute all together 10-12 ¼ and Semi-final own music 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, ORIENTAL SHOW DANCE (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATION Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes

4.2 Length of Solo parts in categories: Note: In Duo, Group, Formation it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. 5. Rules for the Costume

5.1 Oriental Dance Costume may consist of – Special integral dress – Long skirt and traditional or stylized top over a tricot – Pantaloons or leggins worn with a long skirt Children should be encouraged to dress like children and not like teens and adults. Dancers in the children’s division may never appear nude, so that cosume should be integral and must not distort body natural for this age. Limits: – Rather shallow neckline (not allowed deep decollete) – Covered shoulders (costume must have sleeves of any length) – Slit must not be higher than knee – All dancers in the children division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace, but NOT skin colored) Prohibited: – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but the same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves and to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Intimate parts of body (bust, buttock and pubic area) must be covered with cloth materials or must have a lining (not skin colored)

5.2 Oriental Folk Costume must correspond to the chosen dance style. It must also correspond to general limits of children’s costume

5.3 Oriental Show Costume can be of any type but it must correspond to general limits of children’s costumes Prohibited: – Costume materials that suggest sexual, deviate, sadomasochistic or other adult themes – Deep neckline – All dancers in the children’s division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace materials, but NOT skin colored) – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but he same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves ot to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Allowed: – Mini skirts and shorts if it is required by the image. In this case, the costume must fit in way to cover the intimate parts of the dancer´s body (buttock and pubic area) during all the performance – Light make-up, if it is required by the image

  1. Choreography and Image Children should appear as children and not as teens and adults. Their image, music and choreography should be appropriate to the children’s age division. Children’s costumes, hair and make-up must be age appropriate and not distort the age of the child. It is possible to use make-up in Oriental Show Dance discipline to bring out the features of the face or to portray a character. In other Oriental dance disciplines it is prohibited to use make-up.
  2. In the Children’s Age Division it is forbidden to: – use a parter in Oriental dance discipline, while it is allowed in Oriental Folk and Oriental Show disciplines, if it is required by the image – use sharp cutting devices (knives, swords, etc.), if they are not dummy – the extensively executed shimmy movement in standing and walking positions is allowed not more than 4 bars – Use make-up (except Oriental Show ,

BELLY DANCE

Belly Dance / Oriental Show Belly Dance / Oriental Show Folk Belly Dance / Oriental Folk The categories are: Solo Female, Solo Male (only in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show), Duo, Group (3-7 dancers), Formation (8-24 dancers) AGE DIVISIONS All listed Belly Dance disciplines are only for Junior and older age divisions. Seniors may compete in Adult 2 AGE DIVISION AGE RANGE (years of birth listed below are for competition year 2018) Junior 12 – 15 (born in 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006) Adult 1 Adult 2 16 and over (born in 2002, 2001, 2000, 1999, 1998, 1997, 1996, …) 31 and over (born in 1987 and before) Senior 50 and over (Belly Dance /Oriental) (born in 1968, 1967, 1966, …) Dance disciplines for BELLY DANCE: Improvising in drum solo and Raqs Sharqi with organizers music.

3.1. BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: based on the classical style Raqs Sharqi and includes or may consist of elements of Oriental folk dances and styles, but they should not dominate. It is forbidden to use acrobatic movements or lifts, use props or accessories except of canes, finger cymbals, and “conventional veils”. Veils that have been made into “wings” by the use of rods are permitted if they are not the focus of the choreography and are used for dramatic effect at the beginning or end of the piece. Musical accompaniment for BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: classical instrumental work with possible accompaniment of vocals. Modern or pop versions of music may be used if the dance and image created conform to the aforementioned principles.

3.2 Show BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL Show: choreography with compulsory show elements may incorporate any form of dance, however BELLY DANCE original technique predominates. It is allowed to use oriental props and appropriate accessories (two veils, Isis wings, saber, vases, knives, and etc.) and any type of costume. Lifts and acrobatics are allowed. Various dances, styles and fusions of fantasy styles like flamenco oriental, Tribal, oriental tango, gothic and others are welcome. There has to be a development of the plot (introduction, culmination, finale). Competitors in Show BELLY DANCE/Oriental Show should provide the Organizer the title of their show. Stage props and scenery may be used if the competitors themselves put the objects in place during a single visit to the stage and remove them without the help of non-performers. Musical accompaniment for SHOW BELLY DANCE can be any kind of music. Scenic props – limit to bring: 15 seconds solo/duo; 25 seconds group; 45 seconds formation.

 

3.3 ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE: Oriental Folk Dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Alexandrian

Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Shamadan · Falaahii · Bedouin · Moroccan · Tunisian · Algerian · Iranian And other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style e.g. an original Shamadan (it is not allowed to switch on the candles), sticks for Saidi, a pitcher for Tunisian. Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the Organizer the dance style they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.
  2. Duration of the Performance page 55 BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SOLO Juniors, Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors Preliminaries 1/8, 1/16, etc ORGANIZER’S MUSIC 1 minute (Improvising in Drum solo together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Drum solo by group of dancers 4 to 6, 1 minute (Raqs Sharqi together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Raqs Sharqi solo by group of dancers 4 to 6 ¼ and ½ Final, competitors own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes DUOS All rounds 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:30 – 4:00 minutes

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, SHOW BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SHOW (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Juniors Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Juniors, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATION All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 3:00 – 4:00 minutes

Note: In Duo, Group, Formation, it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. Re-dance is possible in following: Re-dance live with compulsory music, paper re-dance and re-dance for the 1st place in the final round (only for competitors in tie for the 1st place). 6. Rules for Costumes

6.1 Change of Costumes and Choreography BELLY DANCE/Oriental Solo Juniors, Seniors: costume may be changed for each round but it is not mandatory. Adult 1 and Adults 2 – ¼ final and ½ final can be the same choreography. Final has to be a new choreography and costume. The dancer’s choreography and image must coincide with the age division in which they are competing. All dancers have to stay on the floor during the whole performance. NOTE: In Oriental Show and Oriental Folk disciplines, in all the rounds a dancer must perform the same choreography

6.2 Costume Limits: – Costume must cover all the intimate parts of a dancer during all the performance. The intimate parts are: bust, buttock,pubic area – Intimate parts must be covered with cloth materials of any color (except skin color and tan materials). In case of using lace materials, the costume must have a not see-through lining – In case of using skin colored materials to cover intimate parts, the costume must not imply nudity. So, these parts must be decorated with lace, strass etc. – The costume must fit in way to cover intimate parts of dancer during all the performance. – It is recommended that all male dancers wear a men´s dance belt underneath their costume. A costume consisting only of a men´s dance belt is prohibited. Male dancers are allowed to perform bare-chested

6.2.1 Belly Dance / Oriental Possible to use integral dress or special bra with a skirt (with or without belt) Upper Body – Forbidden to use open bra – The distance between the bra cups should not be more than 5 cm

Lower Body – Lower part of costume should be a skirt (slit skirt or simple skirt) – Fitting the lower part of the costume should ensure the cover of the vertical line of the buttocks. – Buttocks and Pubic area must be covered with cloth material – In case of the lower part of the costume (skirt) made with see-through or lace materials, the intimate parts must be covered with special panties. – The panties should cover the entire buttock in the back. In the front, the panty line should follow the line between the body and the flexed leg. The distance from the hip line to the panty line should be at least 5 centimetres (2 inches) when measure from the side (pants must cover buttocks and pubic area). – Abbreviated bikini bottoms, thongs, thong appliqués and any shorts imitating a thong look are prohibited. The dancers should make sure their costumes fit properly, as ill-fitting shorts or panties can wedge or otherwise expose the buttock in a way that is prohibited. – The panties must have the same color as the costume. Panties made with skin colored, lace or net materials are forbidden. – A dance costume should not be associated with a beach suit and/or underwear. – In case of a slit skirt, the slit should start not higher than at a distance of 10 cm from the iliac bones.

6.2.2 Oriental Folk The costume should completely correspond to the chosen style. When choosing a costume design, one should follow the general restrictions on costumes (item 6.2). The folk costume should not look open, therefore these elements are not recommended: – High slits (above the middle of the hip) – See-through or lace materials (in case of its use, a costume must have a not see-through lining)

6.2.3 Oriental Show costume can be of any type, but it must comply with the general rules of costumes, including all the restrictions (item 6.2)

6.2.4 Age Restrictions: Costumes and Image Juniors: Juniors should always be dressed age-appropriately and their image should be that of a junior and not that of an adult. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: “adult” costumes; high slits; see-through or skin colored materials. Adults: Adult dancers should bear in mind that they are the ones setting the trend for the younger dancers, who look up to them and seek inspiration from them. This is why it is very important to be dressed in a good taste. Seniors: When choosing a costume for Seniors, should be considered the physiological characteristics, as well as the moral component of the image of dancers of “elegant” age. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: high slits; see -through or net materials.

  1. Dancer’s Number

7.1 For dancers in the show and folk categories it is not necessary to affix their assigned number to their costume.

7.2 For all quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in all categories it is not necessary to affix the competitor’s assigned number to their costume.

7.3 Master of Ceremonies is required to: in quarter-final, semi-final and final competition announce the competitor’s number and full name. For quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in Belly Dance/Oriental Solos, Duos, Groups and Formations – the name of the ensemble or pseudonym (stage name) is sufficient, as it is in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show Dance. 8. Competitors During their Performance 8.1 In Duo, Group, Formation categories all dancers have to stay on the dance floor during the whole performance from the beginning of composition until the end. 9. All dancers have to be ready to dance 30 minutes before their start time and they must give their music to the sound engineer at least 60 minutes prior to the start time. 10. Safety 10.1 It is forbidden to use an open flame, liquids or other substances that may leave the floor wet, damage the stage surface or make it unsafe.

10.2. It is forbidden to use live animals.

  1. Notes for the Organizers When organizing a BELLY DANCE event it is necessary to:

11.1 Ensure that the dance surface is kept clean.

11.2 It is the Organizer’s responsibility to ensure that during the preliminaries for the Adult categories the compulsory music is changed for each heat so that all competitors have equal opportunity for improvising.

11.3 After the semi-final results have been announced for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 a break of at least 15 minutes should be provided so the finalists may change their costumes and music be prepared for the final.

11.4 Provide videotaping of the semi-final and final rounds for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 category in order to check that the rules have been followed with regard to the mandatory change of costume and choreography. 1

FLAMENCO

The categories in Flamenco are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

  1. SOLO PERFORMERS
  2. Solo performers represent one dance on a competition.
  3. Duration of dance up to 3 minutes
  4. The dance can be both in “puro” style, and in a modern direction of flamenco – “fusion”.
  5. Use of additional subjects is allowed.
  6. Participation in dance of supernumeraries or dancers of the second plan is forbidden.

Costumes:

  1. Performers dance in any flamenco dress.
  2. Dance may be performed in trousers if that is demanded by staging. 3. Additional accessories are allowed.
  3. DUOS Duo will be danced by female/female, male/female or male/male – The first round will be organizer’s music to Sevillanas for 1 to 1:15 minutes. The duo can choose one of the 4 parts of the Sevillanas. – The second round for those who have passed to the next round then do a performance to music of their own choice, which can be no longer than 3:30 and no less than 2:30. DUO Costume Regulations 1. First Round – Costumes should be identical for both dancers (an identical style, color, quantity of frill- son a skirt, etc.) – Additional accessories are allowed.
  4. Second Round – Costumes of dancers can be either in identical style, or differ in details. For example, an identical style of top, different skirts, different breed of a dress. – Absolutely different dresses are forbidden. – Dresses should be one style. – Accessories are allowed.
  5. GROUPS The group consist of 3 to 7 competitors. Competitors can present any dance, in any direction of flamenco – “puro”, “fusion”. The time limits: The first round can be no less than 2:30 and not longer than 3:30. In the final round the time limit is raised to 4:30 with a minimum of 2:30. Sevillianas may be used in Small Group.
  6. FORMATION Formations consist of 8 to 24 competitors The dance-group represents one number in any direction of flamenco, with additional subjects, or without them. The same rules will apply as for Group, but the final round will be increased to 5:00. In the Children’s division the limit will be 3:00 minimum and 4:00 maximum.
  7. Group and Formation Costume Regulations · Dresses should be presented in one style. · Distinctions in details of a dress are possible. · Additional accessories are allowed. · Use of man’s suits, at presentation of dance by girls, is allowed. The costume must fit the type of dance they are doing. Hand props may be used such as castanets, fans, Bolero hats and canes. Characteristic: The majority of the dance must be traditional Flamenco to Flamenco music. Deviations from the above must be minor.

BREAK DANCE

The categories of Break Dance are: Solo and Crews. Starting January 1st, 2018 the categories of Break Dance are: Solo Female, Solo Male (B-Boys and B-Girls) and Crews (ADM 2017, Implementation 1.1.2018, no change possible before 2021) Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines. Break Dance is for Juniors and Adults only SOLO 1. Music: Organizer’s music in Break Dance style.

  1. Duration of Performance: Preliminary round: 2 minutes divided into three sections of 40 seconds duration each. Additional opening minute of the 1st round is not evaluated. In the preliminary round, there must be no more than three (3) competitors dancing together. The Chairperson of Adjudicators determines the number of competitors in the opening minute and final 40 seconds in the preliminary round. The best 16 competitors fight in “battles” one by one in a “knock-out-system” (5 – 10 minutes each battle).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Typical Break Dance Elements: Crown, Headspin, Backspin, Turtle, Helicopter, Windmill, Bailey Windmill, Uprock, Freeze, Sixstep, One Hand Up, Swipe, Atomic, Flair, Holoback, Traxx, 99, variable footwork, etc., including different variations of these figures, elements and movements. Keen ‘breaks’ (stopping of movement), isolations, breaking movements, plus acrobatic movements in various combinations are all expected aspects of Break Dance routines. Technical difficulty of performed elements, joining of elements (flowing acrobatic movements melding into one another), originality, etc. are all highly important, and the entire presentation will be evaluated NOTE: It is important to show more than two different figures and elements. Figures danced twice are only counted once. If repeated, the best attempt of the two will be marked.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions for Street Dance.
  5. Forbidden Movements: Elements and figures that, according to the dancer’s ability, are too difficult or that could lead to injuries or loss of life.
  6. Stage Props: As applicable for this discipline. For Teams it is also allowed to use requisites. 8. Break Dance competitions are not organized in the Children age division. 9. Procedure of Break Dance solo competition a. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute ‘warm up’ performance, which the Adjudicators do not evaluate. They then dance (not more than 3) first 40 seconds period. When all dancers finish, they start to perform the 2nd period of 40 seconds in the same order. The final performance gives the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor during the final presentations. Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).

QUALIFICATION: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round, Adjudicators should qualify the best 16. In the first round, the Adjudicators evaluate each dancer with the points from 1 to 10. Criteria for the points are:

  • bad- none of the elements are performed in correct way, out of music
  • 2- bad- one or two elements are performed correct but out of music
  • 3- not bad- dancer is performing weak, choreography is poor
  • 4- not bad- dancer is performing various elements or style
  • 5- satisfactory- dancer is performing various elements or style, but there is no fluidity or is repeating the same element two or more time
  • 6- good- dancer is performing various elements and style, there is not enough power or image is poor
  • 7- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but with the small mistakes
  • 8- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but losing the power
  • 9- excellent- dancer is using different styles and performing various elements on a very high level
  • 10- outstanding- dancer is using different styles, performing various elements and bringing personal note in performance Following the given points Adjudicators will give A, B, C, D letters and additionally X’s, for those that they want into the next round. The Scrutineers count each given letter with the points. The points are given in the following manner: A- 4 points, B- 3 points, C- 2 points, D- 1 point. The cross is counted as 0.5 point. The dancers are sorted out for the next round (spider) by the total amount of points that comes from the given letters and crosses. In case of tie the Scrutineer will use the following rule for the start numbers in tie: first, the number of letters will be counted (C and D for one start number is better than B) and if the tie cannot be broken the given points from all Adjudicators (1-10) will be used in order to select the dancers for the next round. If it is not possible to select the start numbers for the next round after procedure explained in 1 and 2, then the actual redance will be organized by giving the points from 1-10 and letters that are needed for the next round.
  1. BATTLES: In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor Adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairperson of Adjudicators) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All Adjudicators´ decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the Chairperson of Adjudicators.) If there is no clear majority in the break dance battles (crossed arms), one more round (one entrance of each) will be done. After the additional round (entrance), Adjudicators have to clearly decide about their choice, showing the hand to the dancer they would like to see as a winner. Adjudicators have to use the given Adjudicators sheet who they would like to see in the next round. The Adjudicators then show the hand to a dancer following the judging sheet. The Chairperson and Scrutineer control the showing of hands.

 

CREW BATTLES

 

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams = Crews may use their own music in the first round. Organizer’s music in Break Dance Style will be used in the final round.
  3. Duration of Performance in the first round (Show): 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) of each team’s/crew´s performance may be danced using the team’s/ crew´s music. In case that the music is too long or short the crew will be disqualified. The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will last about 5 – 10 minutes. The “Final-Battle” 10 – 15 (20) minutes, according to the Supervisors decision. The last minute will be announced.
  4. Tempo: No restrictions.
  5. Typical Break Dance Elements: Same as for Break Dance Solos, plus: Acrobatics should have some style continuation. Choreography for the exhibition to the team’s own music must be a clear performance of a team, not just a demonstration of unrelated solo performances. Musicality, difficulty of movements and figures, originality and team variability will all be highly evaluated. Synchronized movements, shadow standing, mirror positions and smooth transitions of these components from one into another, along with choreographic variability and work with space will also be evaluated. All typical elements of Break Dance should be performed – Styles – Pop Locking – Power moves – Electric Boogie.
  6. If one crew disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.
  7. The final ‘battle’ portion of each contest shall consist of individual performances of dancers from the competing crews in which each dancer must dance his or her solo part at least one time, and the crew´s performance will be Adjudicatord as a whole.
  8. Based on the first round results, the Chairperson of Adjudicators will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked crews and the 3rd – 4th ranked crews.
  9. All other rules are as outlined under Break Dance Solo.
  10. Procedure of Break Dance Team competition First round is a show of crews who will dance to their own music. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best crews. The Adjudicators give the best crew 4 points (A), the next best crew 3 points (B), the next best crew 2 points (C) and the next best crew 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best crews will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 crews in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairperson of Adjudicators may decide to ask for additional crosses for crew/crews on the next position after 4 best crews (cross means placement). Special note for Break Dance and Electric Boogie: When asked to select Adjudicators for this discipline, each nation should only invite Adjudicators who are very experienced in Break Dance and Electric Boogie. This type of VIP Adjudicator would include past champions, celebrity performers, teachers and choreographers who are all considered experts in this field. This note is intended as a guideline only, and is not a rule.

 

ELECTRIC BOOGIE

The categories of Electric Boogie are: Solo, Duo. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer ’s music 1 minute in all rounds, including the final round.
  2. Tempo: Solos 30-32,5 bars per minute (120-130 beats per minute). Duos 31-32,5 bars p.M. (124-130 bpm)
  3. Typical Movements and Techniques: Sharp electric movements that flow into waves, isolations, robot, pantomime elements, popping, animation, electric shock, walking, puppet, ticking, locking, etc. It is important to show more than two different techniques and movements.
  4. The dancer(s) should endeavor to create illusions in his or her performance to surprise and ‘electrify’ the audience.
  5. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adults Duos.
  6. Stage Props: are allowed, such as masks, glasses, hats etc. – but NO requisites!! Each group of competitors begins with a one-minute performance, dancing together in each round. They then dance three, two or one by one for their one-minute performance or 1 minute performance in the final round. Each group dances a final minute together in each round. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations. Both the opening and final performance give the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers.

SHOW DANCE

OPEN SHOW DANCE

JAZZ DANCE/LYRICAL

TAP DANCE

ACROBATIC DANCE

BALLET - REPERTOIRE/OPEN

NEO CLASSICS

MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY DANCE

BOLLYWOOD

CHARACTER DANCE

FOLK DANCE SHOW

ETHNO SHOW

BELLY DANCE / ORIENTAL

FLAMENCO

STREET DANCE: 

BREAK DANCE

ELECTRIC BOOGIE

HIP HOP

HIP HOP BATTLES

DISCO DANCE

DISCO DANCE - FREE STYLE

STREET DANCE SHOW

DISCO SHOW

COUPLE DANCE DISCIPLINES: 

ARGENTINE TANGO (TANGO SALON, TANGO MILONGA, TANGOVALS AND TANGOESCENARIO)

SALSA

MERANGUE

BACHATA

CARIBBEAN DANCES

SALSA RUEDA DE CASINO TEAMS AND FORMATIONS

CARIBBEAN SHOW

LATIN SHOW

COUPLE DANCE FORMATIONS

SYNCHRO DANCE

OTHER DISCIPLINES: 

PRODUCTION

MTV DANCE

K – POP / Korean pop dance/

MUSIC WITH SINGING LIVE

MUSIC DANCE

MAJORETTE DANCES

MAJORETTE SHOW DANCES

CHEERLEADING

OTHER DANCE

ZUMBA

ZUMBA SHOW

REPRESENTATIVE DANCES

Dance compositions bearing the folklore nature of various nationalities and all theatrical dances of the peoples standing on the academic principles and requirements of the ballet and dance performance: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, modern interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc.. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should match the nature of the nationality.

The following is allowed:
The use of props appropriate to the nature of the nationality;

The following is not allowed:
the use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life endangering props on stage; Performance CANNOT use the same costume for two different dances.

Acrobatic moves 
are allowed, but only if they are key to the characteristics of the national dance. A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points.

Supports no allowed 
for children in the age category of 11 years. “Support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air.

Supports are only allowed 
if it is an essential characteristics of the national dance (no children under age 11 years is allowed to do supports). A technical execution of acrobatic elements that is not up-to-standard will result in reduced points. Note: BELLY DANCE and Latin shows are not allowed. 
The duration of the dance is recommended!
• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.
• Small group – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.• Formation – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.

The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is 2:30 to 3:00 min.

Measurement of time:
From the initial position or entry of the performers on stage to the last position and exit.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 3D system. All finals are in Skating system.

ETHNO SHOW

Characteristics and Movements:
All national dances are included: Hungarian, Russian-Gypsy, Polish, Spanish, interpretations of Bulgarian folklore, Eastern folklore, Greek dances, Moroccan dances, etc. Costumes, music and dance movements in the choreography should be appropriate to the nature of the image depicted by the performance. The use of props is allowed. All props are allowed under the condition that they can be imported and exported by the performer in one entrance on stage.
Note: LATIN and BELLY DANCE SHOWs are not allowed.
The Ethno show allows the use of supports (excluding the infant age group) (“support” means implementing a figure in which the dancer is raised by another and his/her legs are in the air) acrobatics and other theatrical effects.The use of fire installations, sharp, fragile and other life-threatening props as well as dance-area-polluting objects are not allowed on stage! The same costume could not be used for two different dances. Supports are prohibited in the age category of children up to 11 years.An ETHNO show must always have direction, storyline and subtle concept for the public’s amusement.

The duration of the dance is recommended!

• Solo – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.• Duet / couple – from 1:45 to 2:15 min.

• Small groups – from 2:30 to 3:00 min.
• Formations – from 2:30 to 4:00 min.
The time duration of the “formation” category for the age categories 8 /9 to 11 years is a minimum of 2:30 up to a maximum of 3:00 min.

Referee evaluation systems:
Cross system, 4D system.

LATIN SHOW

Characteristics and movements:

When we talk about Latin music in dance styles such as rumba and samba, we do NOT expect Latin American sport dance styles and movements. We expect to see authentic rumba, authentic samba, carnival samba, etc. One of the many original dance styles is required, NOT the 5 IDSF Latin-American dances. The performances are in Latin style and they are danced on any Latin music chosen by the contestants. Options include: salsa, bachata, merengue, son or other Latin-inspired music. Costumes can be Carnival, African , futuristic , street , Caribbean or any combination of these styles or other styles suitable for performing the dance/s. The presentation may be in any form or combination of two or more different styles, including theatrical motions. The performance and costumes should not resemble the ones used in IDSF competitions in Latin-American dances.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of dances and figures, originality, overall presentation and individual choreography are all elements contestants are evaluated on. It is very important to present the harmony between the idea, music, dance, choreography, costumes and props, because the overall image of the team performances in the Latin show is evaluated.

Acrobatic moves:

Permitted.

Lifts:

NOT permitted in the child category, but are allowed in other categories.

Stage props:

All stage props are allowed under the condition that the contestants can bring it/them with one entrance of the dancing area.

MALE/ FEMALE SOLO

Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 seconds; Number of dancers: 1

DUO / Couples Duration of the presentation:

A minimum of 1 minute & 45 seconds up to a maximum of 2 minutes & 15 secondsБрой танцьори: 2

SMALL GROUPS

Duration of the presentation:

A min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 3 minutes

Number of dancers:

3-7

FORMATIONS

Duration of the presentation:

a min. of 2 minutes & 30 seconds up to a max. of 4 minutes;

Number of dancers:

8-24

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 4D system.

ACROBATIC/GYMNASTIC DANCE

Characteristics and Movements:

The Acrobatic dance must include a lot of techniques, e.g.: acrobatics, balance, twisting of the body. Air hands-free figures, controlled movements and acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand supports, turns, somersault. All of them must be connected with dance moves and dance combinations. Emphasis is on strength, elasticity, control and ease of implementation, no matter what technique is being used is key.

A dance based on aerobics or sport Rock and Roll is not allowed.

In regards to the safety, it is prohibited:

• To perform supports / lifts at height bigger than the dancer’s height, as well as various hand throws of the other dancer;

• To fall on knees, stomach or back from a jumping position;

• To begin an acrobatic number from a “flight” phase;

• To perform any acrobatic element for more than three times (only variations are permitted; for example: various forms of presentation of an element – for instance, one hand wheels, wheel with a transition to the ground, elbow wheel, etc.)

Lifts, pyramids, releases:

• Lifts are permitted in the age groups of youth and adults.

• The pyramids are permitted in the age groups “youth” and “adults”. The pyramid is an element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It represents a group position in which the dancers, supporting one another, form a complex figure. During the performance the pyramid should stay fixed for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

• In the age group of young, high pyramids without assistance are prohibited.

• In the age groups of children and young people various throws of one dancer from another are prohibited;

Clothing and decorative items:

The rules for the costumes are in the General Rules of IDO.

• In terms of safety, it is forbidden to wear decorative items like earrings, nose/tongue/belly button/face/skin piercings. Sunglasses, headphones and any decorations of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are prohibited. All decorations must be removed.

(Exceptions: decorations on dresses and temporary tattoos). All accessories, such as hair accessories must be securely fastened and, if possible, must be soft and flat. Long hair must be tied up and it should not conceal the face of the performer.

Stage props:

Stage props are authorized based on the Performing Arts rules and regulations.

Evaluation:

Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements, originality of composition, harmony between design, music, choreography and acrobatic elements and the performance itself are highly valued.

MTV DANCE

Characteristics:

This is a mixture of different dance styles and new creative choreographies inspired by MTV’s tradition. All techniques are allowed.

Music:

Each group selects the music it will dance to. All kinds of musical rhythms are eligible and dancers can compete in the MTV dance competitions.

Duration of the performance:

2:30 to 3:00 minutes for small groups / 3:00 to 4:00 minutes for formations

Tempo:

No restrictions

Characteristics and movements:

Canon and floor movements are allowed. The movements can emphasize the femininity and coquettishness of the female performers slightly – for example: Burlesque show. In MTV style (music videos) a number of well assessed acrobatics must be used. Stage props are allowed. Various compositions in the choreographies such as:  re-positioning, mismatching and other various dance figures are encouraged. All dance techniques are allowed.

Lifts / supports:

All are permitted (except in the children’s age categories).

Referee evaluation systems:

Cross system, 3D system.

CHEERLEADER DANCE

Parades, performances and SPORT dances

If there is interest in this particular style we will send you the required information.

MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY DANCE

The categories of Modern and Contemporary Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.
Modern dance is an artistic form with many styles that has undergone development over a relatively long period of time.
Modern dance is a more relaxed, free style of dance in which choreographer’s uses emotions and moods to design their own steps, in contrast to ballet’s structured code of steps. It has a deliberate use of gravity, whereas ballet strives to be light and airy
The development of modern dance was the logical consequence of the dancing styles that existed at the start of the 20th century, when the modern dancers of that period attempted to break free from established ballet forms, which they considered to be stiff, strict and restrictive and therefore they started searching for new trends and techniques to give dance a new direction.
This particular dance discipline concerns using modern dancing techniques that were created for the most part during the first half of the 20th century by renowned dance teachers and choreographers, /e.g. Martha Graham, Jos? Limon, Alvin Ailey, Merce Cunningham, Lester Horton and a host of others on the American continent, and Kurt Jooss, Mery Wigman, Hanya Holm and many others in Europe /
In view of the fact that all dance remains in a constant state of movement and development, this does not mean that we have to use only the aforementioned techniques in their original forms. On the contrary, it is also about using contemporary trends in modern dance techniques that either goes back to the foundations established by the aforementioned dance instructors or we can use totally new, experimental and original concepts for modern dance. Contemporary dance brings new informations about body and how the body works, offers new quality of movement, new shapes of body in area, brings new composition process and space for experiment.

Characteristics and Movement:

the entire routine must consist of modern dance techniques and current trends, and should correspond with age categories and the movement skills of the dancers.
Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Modern dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Modern dance performances.
The main point of assessment for this discipline will be the level of the dance movements carried out, as well as the theme and story line. The story, the building of a plot, is possible, but not so much emphasized here as, for example, for Show dance. It is primarily about pictures, moods.
In Modern Dance, a story, theme, idea or concept may be used but must always be in good taste for children, junior and adult situations, but human situations, especially those dealing with intimate or personal relationships should acceptable to viewing by all ages.

Acrobatics and Lifts:

Acrobatic movements are allowed. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions and are prohibited in the Children age division.

Props and Backgrounds:

Stage props are allowed to the extent that the stage setting for the choreography does not overshadow the dance itself. Backgrounds are prohibited.

Clothing:

Aesthetic, tasteful and age division appropriate.

JAZZ DANCE/LYRICAL

The categories of Jazz Dance are: Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Primitive:

This dance form stemmed from early African Folk Dances that were done by slaves brought to America from Africa, West Indies, Cuba, Panama and Haiti.

Early:

Originated via the music of the late 1800’s and early 1900’s. Dances included the Two-Step or Cakewalk, and later became the Grizzly Bear, Bunny Hug, Turkey Trot, and Texas Tommy. This evolved into the fast music and dances of the 1920’s, the One-Step, Lindy Hop, Charleston and Black Bottom.

Musical Comedy / Theatre Jazz:

These forms of Jazz became very popular via movies / theatre during the 1930s and 1940s. Many dance forms were incorporated in Musical Comedy Jazz. Ballet with “On Your Toes”, and Modern Dance in “Oklahoma” and “Brigadoon”. During the 1950s and 1960s, dance became an integral part of telling the story in Musical Theatre, as illustrated in musicals such as “Flower Drum Song”, “Destry Rides Again”, “West Side Story” and “Seven Brides for Seven Brothers”. In 1978, the musical “Dancing” showed that the songs and books were secondary to the dancing; in fact, they are almost non-existent.

Contemporary:

Primarily performed to music of the day, it began in the late 1950s to the music of Contemporary Jazz musicians like Dizzy Gillespie, Art Tatum and Dave Brubeck.

Today’s Jazz Dance:

This discipline may be danced using many different styles and tempos, using themes based on Afro-Cuban, Oriental, Spanish or other national themes. It may be performed as a character, such as Cowboy, Sailor, Clown, etc. It may also be abstract in nature. Lyrical Jazz, performed to such music as Bette Midler’s “Wind Beneath My Wings”, may be included in Jazz Dance Discipline, as well as Modern Dance.

NOTE: Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Jazz Dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Jazz Dance performances.

Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Characteristics and Movement: Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

• Must: The entire routine must consist of Jazz work. Jazz technique, turns, jumps isolations, stretch, as well as use of port de bras, legs and upper body. Timing and rhythm will be considered in marking. Suitable footwear must be worn.

• Acrobatic Movements: In Jazz Dance limited acrobatics will be allowed as long as a body part is touching the floor, and does not dominate the routine.

• Lifts: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions in Adult and Junior divisions.

NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age divisions.

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

• Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

Clothing: All costume accessories, such as hats, scarves, gloves, belts, etc., may be worn if they are an integral part of the costume. They may be taken off, exchanged or discarded, but not left to litter the stage. Meaning, the dancer cannot leave the stage at the end of the routine leaving clothing behind. If a dancer discards or drops a scarf on the state, they must pick it up and take it off when they leave.

Hand Props: All hand props such as canes, umbrellas, hand bags, brief cases, mirrors, flags, etc., may be used as long as they are an integral part and used throughout the routine. They may be set down on the floor as long as it remains part of the routine and picked up when leaving the stage at the end of the routine. Hand props can never be used as floor props. In other words, you cannot enter the stage with an umbrella, set it on the floor, dance your entire routine without utilizing the umbrella and then pick it up at the end of the routine and leave the stage.

Floor Props: Necessary floor props such as a chair, stool, box, ladder, etc., may be carried on by a dancer in one trip, but must be an integral part of the routine and utilized throughout the entire performance. Items used to decorate or embellish the stage are not permitted. The dancer must carry the floor prop off the state at the end of the routine.

Scenic or stage props: Any items such as a scenic background, back drop, tree or other such prop, used to create a scene or embellish the stage are not permitted.

 Lip-sync is not allowed in Jazz Dance. 

Show Dance VS Jazz 

The difference between Show Dance and Jazz is very difficult, but not impossible, to define. Jazz Dance styles range from the early 1920s to the present, and most Jazz Dance pieces are created using pure dance without consideration to theme or story. This is an ever-evolving Performing Art dance, and one could very readily argue the point that all of the Street dances contain some elements of Jazz. How do we draw the line between Jazz and Street Dance? Definitely the music. The music dictates the style. Does that mean that Hip-Hop or Break Dance music cannot be used in a Jazz piece? No, because the style of the dance dictates what discipline it actually is.

Therefore, a Jazz Dance piece can be done to Hip-Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie music, but never a Hip- Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie to Jazz music. Since there is no specific style of music identifiable as Jazz Dance or Show Dance, music cannot be used to determine if the discipline is correct. However: the difference in styles can be used to make this determination.

Although Show Dance pieces may be based on a theme or story, there are many variables that exist. A Show Dance piece can be based on emotions, color and design, or even one word, such as ‘devastation’ or ‘jubilation.’ Jazz Dance does not have to convey any of the above criteria, and may be done based on pure dance only. For instance, a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ might be based on movement formation, color and costume. Another piece danced to the same or different music might be built on a theme of floating dancers, be enhanced by costume de- sign and originality, and feature terrific use of the music. Would a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ do well in a Jazz Dance competition? The answer to that would be in the eyes of the beholder, but a strong Jazz Dance piece would certainly give such a piece a run for its money if the former was not based on true Jazz technique.

Lyric or Modern may be the base technique for either Show Dance or Jazz Dance. It all depends on how much of a ‘show’ the piece really is. A straight lyric piece to Whitney Houston, without a theme or story line, would not do very well. Judging for IDO competitions is based on the ‘3 D’ system of separate evaluations for technique, composition and image. The show quality of the routine may enter into all three of these separate dimensions. The ability to use technique to enhance the theme or story being told is very important. The choreography and the way the dancer performs it must be of show quality, and the image that the dancer creates is also very important to the show value of a given piece. But judges should not be influenced by the show value of a Jazz Dance routine. Their marks for technique should be based purely on technique, choreography purely on choreography, and image marks should be based on the total look of the performer.

BALLET

The categories in Ballet are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Time limit is one (1) minute minimum for male and female solo variations, maximum 2:15 minutes. All other time limits see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Characteristics and Movement:

Classical Ballet is the most formal of the ballet styles; it adheres to traditional ballet technique. There are variations relating to area of origin, such as Russian ballet, French ballet, British ballet and Italian ballet. The Vaganova method, named after Agrippina Vaganova and the Cecchetti method, named after Enrico Cecchetti are Russian and Italian respectively and derive from the original French method. Classical ballet is best known for its unique features and techniques, such as pointe work, turn-out of the legs, and high extensions; its graceful, flowing, precise movements; and its ethereal qualities. This discipline must be performed using the Classical Ballet Technique and style and may be performed in soft ballet slippers or Pointe shoes. Although choreography may be of a modern nature, it may not deviate from what is commonly known as Classical Ballet. Lyric, Modern and Modern Jazz pieces may not be performed in this discipline. Pointe work is not allowed in the children’s category.

Acrobatic Movements:

Not permitted in the Ballet discipline.

Lifts:

Permitted (and encouraged) as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Any lifts used must remain in the Classical Ballet tradition, and may include drop-falls, supported turns and jumps resulting in catches. However, all dances are in a constant evolution and growth, so experimental and original choreography is encouraged.

Stage Props:

Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts but dancers cannot use cumber- some scenic material and must carry on and off the stage themselves in one trip.

HIP HOP

The categories of Hip Hop are:

Solo male, Solo female, Duo, Small Group and Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO MALE, SOLO FEMALE AND DUO

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer’s music 1 minute.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute) (downbeat, more groove).
  3. Characteristics and Movement: Hip-Hop includes different new dance styles, such as Hype Dance, New-Jack- Swing, Jamming, etc., adding creative elements such as stops, jokes, flashes, swift movements, etc. Some Electric Boogie movements can be performed but should not dominate. Hip-Hop is mostly danced on the eighth notes with a typical bounce, or jumping action (New- Jack-Swing).
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  7. Special Note for Duos: Both dancers should dance together, not only for themselves or one by one. Their performance should include synchronized steps such as Follow the Leader, shadow and mirror design, as well as patterns and dancing the same steps. A mixture of all possibilities is important.

Procedure of Competition: In each round the dancers perform three (3) times. Each group of competitors begins and ends with a one-minute performance dancing together in each round. Number of dancers on the floor in subsequent rounds during second minute of performance is specified in the Section 3.12.2 General Rules & Regulations for Competitions.

Both opening and final minutes are to give the Judges an opportunity to compare dancers.

To avoid any risk of injuries Judges shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations.

SMALL GROUPS

  1. Length of Exhibition: Organizer ?s music 2 minutes.
  2. Tempo: 27 – 28 bars per minute (108 – 112 beats per minute), downbeat, groove.
  3. Dancers of each group dance together, two or three at a time. In final round they perform one by one.
  4. Musicality, (rhythm, breaks), dance variety and originality, together with well-done and well- performed stage and individual choreography, will be highly evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of music, dance and costume, which should underline the special Hip-Hop character.
  5. Lifts: Not permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.
  6. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).
  7. Groups will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not control / dominate.
  8. All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo.

FORMATIONS

  1. Formations dance to their own music.
  2. Length of Exhibition: 2 minutes&30 seconds minimum to 3 minutes maximum.
  3. Tempo for Hip Hop Formation cannot be more than 30 bars per minute (120 beats), there is no limit down. However, it is allowed to be out of this tempo range for a maximum of 30 seconds.
  4. Music: Must be typically Hip Hop as it is currently known in the Hip Hop scene, including break beats.
  5. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo parts may be performed but must not dominate.
  6. Lifts: Permitted only in junior and adult formation.
  7. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines).

All other rules are as outlined under Hip Hop: Solo Male / Female, Duo & Small Group. 

SHOW DANCE

The categories in Show Dance are:

Solo male, solo female, duo, small group, formation.

Adult division duo is divided in two categories:

DUO female-female

DUO male-female or duo male-male
The dancer must only be represented in either two females, two males or male/female in any given competition Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. DEFINITION OF SHOW DANCEShow Dance in the broadest sense is based either on any Jazz/Lyrical, Ballet and/or Modern and Contemporary dance technique. Other dance disciplines can also be incorporated but cannot dominate. Ballroom, Latin or Rock ’n’ Roll (in the IDSF & WDC way) are excluded and cannot be performed. Show Dance allows the use of lifts (except for Children), acrobatics, props, lip-sync and other theatrical effects. An IDO Show Dance number always has to have a guideline, story or visible concept to entertain the audience.
  2. When movements and elements of other IDO dance disciplines such as Disco Dance, Hip-Hop, Electric Boogie, Break Dance and Tap, or when American & International Ballroom and Latin Dance is used in the performance, such movements / styles should not control / dominate the performance.
  3. The dancer’s personal interpretation should be clearly evident when using any of these disciplines or styles.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Acrobatic movements will be evaluated under show criteria and must never dominate and must be in harmony with the idea or theme. If modern gymnastic movements dominates a performance a significantly reduction of points in the technique dimension should be the consequence.
  5. Lifts: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age division.
  6. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.
  1. Musicality, variety of dance and patterns, originality, total performance and individual choreography will be evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of idea, music, dance, choreography, costume and props in the presentation, as the entire image will be used in evaluating the performance.
  2. Formations will be judged as a whole. Solo, duo or ensemble parts may be performed, but must not dominate.
  3. All Show Dance presentations shall be based on a concept, story, theme or idea. There must be a title of the Show. The concept, story, theme or idea must be fully understandable and will be expressed by means of dance movements that adhere to the piece being presented, along with being creative, imaginative and original. The piece must have Show Value, as explained in the Judging Procedure (Section Protocol and Judging Procedure)

MINI PRODUCTIONS AND PRODUCTIONS

A Production is defined as an elaborate theatrical presentation, dominated by dance, which may include any IDO discipline or any combination thereof, using a story, theme, or concept. Since its primary purpose will be to entertain, it will be under the jurisdiction and administration of the Performing Arts Department.

Although all IDO disciplines will compete against each other in this category, specific rules as outlined under each discipline will be adhered to unless otherwise specified in the rules that follow.

Allowable DANCE FORMS:

This category will be open to all or any combination of dance disciplines under the auspices of the IDO. Dance disciplines under the control of the WDC, the IDSF and the WRRC may not participate in any IDO event unless special dispensation is given by the official organization representing that particular discipline.

AGE Limits:

There will be no age restrictions and all ages will compete against one another. No dancer will be represented in more than one Production at any event. However, dancers may participate in both Mini and Production, as long as the content of each performance is not duplicated.

Production CATEGORIES:

  • Large Productions – called “Productions”
  • Mini ProductionsTIME Limits:Large ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 5 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)Mini ProductionsThe minimum performance time limit, including the opening entrance and the final exit, is 3 minutes and the maximum is 8 minutes. (Set up time is explained below)STAGE PROPS and SCENERY:

There will be a total of 5 minutes to set up and 5 minutes to break down scenic sets, backdrop and stage props. All set ups and breakdowns must be made by stagehands provided by the school, club or group presenting the Production. Liquids or other substances that can litter, damage or make the dance floor/stage unsafe, may not be used. Both fire and working weapons are not permitted.

NUMBER of Performers:

Large Productions

At least 25 dancers minimum, with no maximum, are allowed in this category. However, it is the producer of the production’s responsibility to make sure the stage or dance floor is large enough to accommodate the number of dancers one wishes to present.

Mini Productions

At least 3 dancers minimum, with maximum of 12 dancers, are allowed in this category.

FEES:

Every performer appearing in the Production, including dancers, singers, and musicians, along with any other supporting cast must pay the start fee outlined in the IDO Rules Book. This is a lifetime license.

PRESENTATION:

A Production may include solo, duo and ensemble performers as long as long as solo and duo performers do not dominate the performance. Both lifts and/or acrobatic movements are allowed, as long as they do not threaten the well-being of the dancers. Other theatrical effects such as fog, laser lighting, magic and illusions may be presented, without restriction, provided they are not hazardous to the performers, stagehands or audience.

MUSIC:

All types of music may be used as long as it is not offensive to the public or IDO. Music containing inappropriate or offensive lyrics will not be permitted. Live music may be used as long as the musicians are part of the Production being presented.

LIVE MUSIC

  1. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine.
  2. The Organizer must be advised by email prior to 4 weeks preceding the event. The email MUST explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  3. All equipment must be brought in and set–up by the Dancers and/or Musicians.
  4. Set–up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  5. The set-up and break down of all equipment must not take more then 5 minutes.
  6. Live music AND recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music.For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems.
    1. House system – for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only.
    2. Additional portable amplification system supplied by the entrant for live music/vocals
    3. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music
  7. Suggested live music:
    Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums and percussion, bass, keyboards. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

Responsibility of the Organizer:

It is the Organizer’s responsibility to provide normal stage amenities as out- lined in the IDO Rules Book. The Organizer must provide equal opportunity for all productions. It is the full responsibility of the school, club, group or independent entry to supply all special effects, as well as the necessary stagehands for proper and safe operation. It is also their responsibility to check with the Organizers to make sure all special effects are allowed in the auditorium or competition facility.

HIP HOP BATTLES

The categories of Hip Hop Battles are:

Solo and Teams.
Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

SOLO

Music:

  1. Organizer’s music in different Hip Hop styles.
  2. Duration of Performance: 4-6 entries, each 0:30-1:00 min.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
  • Ragga
  • R&B
  • House
  • D.step
  • Popping

3. always OLD SCHOOL

solo BATTLES

 

1st round

1/8 final

1/4 final

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. place

Battle 1/2. place

1.

1:00 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

4.

1:00 OLD

——

——

——

——

——

5.

——

——

——

——

——

——

  1. Tempo:

No restrictions, but very different because of the different styles

  1. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines, including those typical of Break Dance, but should not control / dominate the performance.
  2. Stage Props: Not permitted (see more under General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines)
  3. Procedure of HipHop Solo Battle competition:
    1. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors (heats) begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute performance in “New Style”, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor.. Then they dance 2 times 30-40 seconds in some other Style: Ragga or R&B or House or D. Step or Popping or others, but not more than 6 dancers on the floor. The final performance is “Old School”, again one minute.The Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).
    2. Qualification: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round,adjudicatorsshouldqualify the best 16, which they divide into 4 classes/categories (A=best, B=2nd best, C=3rd best, D=4th best). For those whom they want to qualify, they use the following point system. The adjudicator gives the best 4 dancers 4 points(A), the next best 4 dancers 3 points(B), the next best 4 dancers 2 points(C) and the next best dancers 1 point(D) each. For those whom they do not want to qualify they give no points. According to achieved summary of points the RANKING of the 16 best dancers is made, in which first four dancers belong to A class, 4 next to B class, 4 next to C class and 4 to D class. If there are more than 20competitors in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for dancers on first next position after 16 best dancers (cross means placement on the 17th position and is taken into consideration in case of tie).

c. BATTLES:

In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairman of Judges) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All adjudicators ? decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the chairman of judges.

Ranking after the 1st round:

1A 5B 9C 13D

2A 6B 10C 14D

3A 7B 11C 15D

4A 8B 12C 16D

 If there is 10 to 17 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 8 dancers, 2 of class A (4 points), 2 of class B (3 points), 2 of class C (2 points), and 2 of class D (1 point). Then in next round there are only 4 battles (A1/D8; B3/C6; A2/D7; B4/C5). The winners of these four battles will go on to two battles and finally will be one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place.

If there is less than 10 competitors in the 1st round, adjudicators will qualify only 4 dancers, one of each class and then there are only 2 battles (A1/D4 and B2/C3); followed by battles of the winners of previous 2 battles (one battle for 1st place and one battle for 3rd place).

TEAM

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams may use their own music in the first round. Organizer ’s music will be used from 2nd round.

HH BATTLES MUSIC SCHEDULE:

  1. always NEW STYLE
  2. DIFFERENT STYLES
    • Ragga
    • R&B
    • House
    • D.step
    • Popping
  3. always OLD SCHOOL

team BATTLES

 

1st round

1/2 final

Battle 3/4. and 1/2. place

1.

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

0:30-0:40 NEW

2.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

3.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

4.

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

0:30-0:40

5.

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD

0:30-0:40 OLD
  1. Duration of Performance: 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) in first round (Show). The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will have up to 5 entries (different styles). The “Final-Battle” up to 7 entries (different styles).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Stage props are allowed in hip hop battle teams.
  4. If one team disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.

Based on the first round results, the Chairman of Judges will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked teams an d the 3rd – 4th ranked teams.

All other rules are as outlined under SOLO. Procedure of HipHop Battle Team competition:

First round is a show of teams who will dance to their own music. Judges must be aware that teams are presenting at least 2 different styles. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best teams. The Adjudicators give the best team 4 points (A), the next best team 3 points(B), the next best team 2 points(C) and the next best team 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best teams will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 teams in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairman of Judges may decide to ask for additional crosses for team/teams on the next position after 4 best teams (cross means placement).

If the time frame allows, Organizer Chairman and Supervisor can decide, to use the big spider (as Solos), so there go 8 or 16 teams into the battles.

TAP DANCE

The categories of Tap Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Trio, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Although the primary emphasis should be on the harmonious blend of the dancer’s footwork (sound), many variables exist. All forms of tap will compete against each other, such as: Rhythm, Hoofing, Buck and Wing, Waltz Clog, Military, Precision Kick Line, Latin and Musical Theater. 2. Jingle taps, double taps or double claques are not permitted.
  2. The music must not contain prerecorded taps.
  3. Personal amplification devices are not permitted.
  4. No more than 30 seconds of a cappella or tacet (silence) may be used in any one routine. The absence of music must occur within the music and not at the beginning or end. “Stop Time” is an open part of a measure of music, not played but silent, with some notes being played. “A Capella” is an open phrase of multiple measures in length, but completely absent (silent) of any/all music.

NOTE: Music must be played at the beginning and end of the music and the A Capella must be no longer than 30 seconds. A Capella can also be defined as “Tacit.”

  1. The dancer’s taps and the music must be clearly audible to the audience and adjudicators. NOTE: The Organizer must make sure the stage has adequate floor microphones and speakers to make this possible.
  2. Acrobatic Movements that are an integral part of the routine are permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts, but will not enhance the dancer’s score. (see in General Rules restriction for Children, p.42)
  3. Regarding health and safety issues in Tap dance, it is not allowed to dance or perform toe work (dancing on pointe) in the Children’s age division for longer than one beat of music. The definition of this being dancing or standing on the tips of the toes in weight-bearing steps on one or both feet. Toe work/dancing on pointe will be for no longer than one beat of the music on one or both feet in Children’s Division. NOTE: No more than one beat and NO weight bearing pointe work at any time. This is stated strictly to clarify the rule already in effect

LIVE MUSIC during Junior and Adult Groups:

  1. This is a separate category and cannot be mixed with other categories.
  2. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine. The ages of the musicians are not relevant unless they are also dancers.
  3. The Organizer must be advised by email 4 weeks prior to the event. The email must explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.
  4. All equipment must be brought in and set up by the Dancers and/or musicians.
  5. Set up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.
  6. The set up and break down of the musical equipment and portable amplification must not take more than 3 minutes.
  7. Live music and recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music. For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems: a. House system for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only. b. The entrant may supply additional portable amplification system for live music/vocals. c. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music 8. Suggested live music: Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums, percussion, bass and keyboards may be used to make music. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

ACROBATIC DANCE

The categories of Acrobatic/ Gymnastic Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Characteristics and Movement: Acrobatic dance shall include many techniques, such as tumbling, balancing, contortions, and aerial tricks without hands and controlled movement, as well as acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand support elements, turns, rolls, walkovers and saltos, all of which should be connected with dance movement and dance combinations. The emphasis is on strength, stretch, control and ease of movement, no matter what technique is being used. It is forbidden to form routine on the basic Aerobic and sport Rock’ n ’Roll ­elements. For safety reasons it is forbidden in all age divisions: · To perform supports/lifts higher than dancers’ height as well as different throws from hands of other dancer except in the adult division. · To fall on the knees, stomach and back from the jumping position; · To begin an acrobatic walkover within flight phase; – To perform any acrobatic element more than three times (variations are allowed i.e. performance of different forms of the element. For example: cartwheel, one hand cartwheel, cartwheel with transition to the floor, elbow cartwheel etc.). · To perform headstand (head balance).

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

BOLLYWOOD

The categories of Bollywood are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Although Bollywood dance has its origins in Traditional Indian dance, it is made up of many differing dance styles including Indian Classical, Bhangra, Arabic, Folk, Tribal, Latino, Hip Hop, Street Dance, “Michael Jackson”, and many others.

We must, however, remember that in Bollywood there must be a contrast of dance styles and movement, depending on the music. It is important to use Lip Sync and Mime, to encourage enactment of some of the lyrics. This discipline must apply technique, grace, speed, style, versatility, body isolation, spatial awareness, energy, facial expression and emotion, whether solo, towards a partner or within a group. Many Bollywood dancers are also actors, so this skill needs to be shown.

MOVEMENT: We would expect to see much Indian dance influence, including Hand Gestures, Postures, Head Slides, Classical moves in arms, legs, feet, knee squats, etc., even within very Modern pieces.

COSTUME: This can be from Classical Indian (with or without ghunghroos/ankle bells) to a “Hoodie Look” to Futuristic, and even a mix, as long as it is in keeping with the dance style, music, Production piece, but still remain tasteful, and respect age.

FACIAL EXPRESSION: This is a very important part of Bollywood, so all parts of the face need to be worked. Eyes especially play an important part. Within this section we would expect to see Lip Sync, as well as many different emotions.

MAKE UP: Must be in keeping at all times, and must respect age. LIFTS & ACROBATICS: These may be included, again, as long as they are in keeping (although not expected). Lifts are not permitted for Children and Mini Kids. AGE: In Productions can be mix of all age divisions. PROPS & SCENERY: All exactly as Performing Arts. However, hand props such as a hand mirror, flowers, jewellery, etc., can play an important role in a performance.

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited. In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited. Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book. For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat. Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

CHARACTER / FOLK DANCE SHOW/ ETHNIC

  1. Characteristics and Movement: Character Dance pertains to dances portraying characters from traditional Ballets, Opera, Broadway style Musical Theatre, TV or Video. The range of characters is very broad and may include: The Wolf from Peter and the Wolf, Little Red Riding Hood, a Bird, Dog, Cat, Flower, Butterfly, Animal, Sailor, Nurse, Religious Preacher, Pauper, Prince or Shirley Temple. Costuming, music and dance movements must be appropriate to the character being presented.

Folk and Ethnic Dance: These disciplines must be Traditional Dances of any Nationality, passed down from generation to generation, and may include: Polonaise, Polynesian, American Indian, Highland Fling, Flamenco, Japanese Candle Dance, Hindu, Tarantella, African, etc. Traditional / authentic costuming and music is expected, and will be used in the total evaluation.

  1. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE:

Arabic folk dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Recommended Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Falaahii · Baladi Shaabi (used only for children vocals) · Muashahat · Bandari · Simsimiya (Bambuti) · Bedouin Not recommended for children Style: · Moroccan · Iraqi · Tunisian (because there are movements of after wedding ceremony) · Algerian · Iranian · Shamadan · Eskandarani · ritual dances and other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style For example: Sticks for Saidi… Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the organizer the dance style, they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.

4.1 Time Limits: ORIENTAL DANCE SOLO Preliminaries, 1/8, 1/16, etc. Organizer’s Music 1 minute all together – 1 minute improvisation in a group of 4-6 1 minute all together 10-12 ¼ and Semi-final own music 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, ORIENTAL SHOW DANCE (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Preliminary 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Semi- final, final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS, FORMATION Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes

4.2 Length of Solo parts in categories: Note: In Duo, Group, Formation it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. 5. Rules for the Costume

5.1 Oriental Dance Costume may consist of – Special integral dress – Long skirt and traditional or stylized top over a tricot – Pantaloons or leggins worn with a long skirt Children should be encouraged to dress like children and not like teens and adults. Dancers in the children’s division may never appear nude, so that cosume should be integral and must not distort body natural for this age. Limits: – Rather shallow neckline (not allowed deep decollete) – Covered shoulders (costume must have sleeves of any length) – Slit must not be higher than knee – All dancers in the children division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace, but NOT skin colored) Prohibited: – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but the same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves and to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Intimate parts of body (bust, buttock and pubic area) must be covered with cloth materials or must have a lining (not skin colored)

5.2 Oriental Folk Costume must correspond to the chosen dance style. It must also correspond to general limits of children’s costume

5.3 Oriental Show Costume can be of any type but it must correspond to general limits of children’s costumes Prohibited: – Costume materials that suggest sexual, deviate, sadomasochistic or other adult themes – Deep neckline – All dancers in the children’s division must have their torso covered (allowed net or lace materials, but NOT skin colored) – Costumes made entirely from see-through materials, but he same material may be used for decoration elements, sleeves ot to cover legs – Costumes made of skin colored materials or costumes implying nudity Allowed: – Mini skirts and shorts if it is required by the image. In this case, the costume must fit in way to cover the intimate parts of the dancer´s body (buttock and pubic area) during all the performance – Light make-up, if it is required by the image

  1. Choreography and Image Children should appear as children and not as teens and adults. Their image, music and choreography should be appropriate to the children’s age division. Children’s costumes, hair and make-up must be age appropriate and not distort the age of the child. It is possible to use make-up in Oriental Show Dance discipline to bring out the features of the face or to portray a character. In other Oriental dance disciplines it is prohibited to use make-up.
  2. In the Children’s Age Division it is forbidden to: – use a parter in Oriental dance discipline, while it is allowed in Oriental Folk and Oriental Show disciplines, if it is required by the image – use sharp cutting devices (knives, swords, etc.), if they are not dummy – the extensively executed shimmy movement in standing and walking positions is allowed not more than 4 bars – Use make-up (except Oriental Show ,

BELLY DANCE

Belly Dance / Oriental Show Belly Dance / Oriental Show Folk Belly Dance / Oriental Folk The categories are: Solo Female, Solo Male (only in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show), Duo, Group (3-7 dancers), Formation (8-24 dancers) AGE DIVISIONS All listed Belly Dance disciplines are only for Junior and older age divisions. Seniors may compete in Adult 2 AGE DIVISION AGE RANGE (years of birth listed below are for competition year 2018) Junior 12 – 15 (born in 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006) Adult 1 Adult 2 16 and over (born in 2002, 2001, 2000, 1999, 1998, 1997, 1996, …) 31 and over (born in 1987 and before) Senior 50 and over (Belly Dance /Oriental) (born in 1968, 1967, 1966, …) Dance disciplines for BELLY DANCE: Improvising in drum solo and Raqs Sharqi with organizers music.

3.1. BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: based on the classical style Raqs Sharqi and includes or may consist of elements of Oriental folk dances and styles, but they should not dominate. It is forbidden to use acrobatic movements or lifts, use props or accessories except of canes, finger cymbals, and “conventional veils”. Veils that have been made into “wings” by the use of rods are permitted if they are not the focus of the choreography and are used for dramatic effect at the beginning or end of the piece. Musical accompaniment for BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL: classical instrumental work with possible accompaniment of vocals. Modern or pop versions of music may be used if the dance and image created conform to the aforementioned principles.

3.2 Show BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL Show: choreography with compulsory show elements may incorporate any form of dance, however BELLY DANCE original technique predominates. It is allowed to use oriental props and appropriate accessories (two veils, Isis wings, saber, vases, knives, and etc.) and any type of costume. Lifts and acrobatics are allowed. Various dances, styles and fusions of fantasy styles like flamenco oriental, Tribal, oriental tango, gothic and others are welcome. There has to be a development of the plot (introduction, culmination, finale). Competitors in Show BELLY DANCE/Oriental Show should provide the Organizer the title of their show. Stage props and scenery may be used if the competitors themselves put the objects in place during a single visit to the stage and remove them without the help of non-performers. Musical accompaniment for SHOW BELLY DANCE can be any kind of music. Scenic props – limit to bring: 15 seconds solo/duo; 25 seconds group; 45 seconds formation.

 

3.3 ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE: Oriental Folk Dance reflects the national features, traditions, habits, music, costume and history of a peoples’ society living in a particular place, region or country. It is the cultural property of all people of a given territory. Dance styles Oriental FOLK DANCE: · Saidi · Alexandrian

Khaleegy · Nubian · Dabke · Ghawazee · Haggallah · Shamadan · Falaahii · Bedouin · Moroccan · Tunisian · Algerian · Iranian And other dances of Arabian culture and territorial countries in North Africa, Middle East and Persian Gulf. Folkloric dances must be performed using music of the particular nationality being represented, in a corresponding costume and contain characteristic movements, manners, and themes of that specific folk genre. Oriental stage props or accessories have to belong to the particular dancing style e.g. an original Shamadan (it is not allowed to switch on the candles), sticks for Saidi, a pitcher for Tunisian. Competitors in Oriental Folk Dance should provide the Organizer the dance style they will perform.

  1. Music In any round it is imperative that the performer’s music be the only piece of music on the recording. The duration of the piece should be in accordance with the rules of specific category and age division. It is the responsibility of the performer or a representative of the performer to provide the person who is responsible for the sound well in advance, but at an appropriate time, with the recording indicating the number and name of the performer. (Semi-final: one of either CD with one track. Final: another CD with one track). In the event that these requirements are not met by the performer the right to participate in the competition may be revoked.
  2. Duration of the Performance page 55 BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SOLO Juniors, Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors Preliminaries 1/8, 1/16, etc ORGANIZER’S MUSIC 1 minute (Improvising in Drum solo together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Drum solo by group of dancers 4 to 6, 1 minute (Raqs Sharqi together in a group of 10 to 12) – 1 minute Raqs Sharqi solo by group of dancers 4 to 6 ¼ and ½ Final, competitors own music 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes DUOS All rounds 1:00 – 1:30 minutes Final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:30 – 2:00 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATIONS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:30 – 4:00 minutes

ORIENTAL FOLK DANCE, SHOW BELLY DANCE/ORIENTAL SHOW (ALL-COMPETITORS OWN MUSIC) SOLO Juniors Adults 1, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes DUOS Juniors, Adults 2, Seniors All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Adults 1 Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes GROUPS Preliminaries, Semi-final 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 2:00 – 3:00 minutes FORMATION All rounds 1:45 – 2:15 minutes Final 3:00 – 4:00 minutes

Note: In Duo, Group, Formation, it is possible to use solo dance but only four bars. Re-dance is possible in following: Re-dance live with compulsory music, paper re-dance and re-dance for the 1st place in the final round (only for competitors in tie for the 1st place). 6. Rules for Costumes

6.1 Change of Costumes and Choreography BELLY DANCE/Oriental Solo Juniors, Seniors: costume may be changed for each round but it is not mandatory. Adult 1 and Adults 2 – ¼ final and ½ final can be the same choreography. Final has to be a new choreography and costume. The dancer’s choreography and image must coincide with the age division in which they are competing. All dancers have to stay on the floor during the whole performance. NOTE: In Oriental Show and Oriental Folk disciplines, in all the rounds a dancer must perform the same choreography

6.2 Costume Limits: – Costume must cover all the intimate parts of a dancer during all the performance. The intimate parts are: bust, buttock,pubic area – Intimate parts must be covered with cloth materials of any color (except skin color and tan materials). In case of using lace materials, the costume must have a not see-through lining – In case of using skin colored materials to cover intimate parts, the costume must not imply nudity. So, these parts must be decorated with lace, strass etc. – The costume must fit in way to cover intimate parts of dancer during all the performance. – It is recommended that all male dancers wear a men´s dance belt underneath their costume. A costume consisting only of a men´s dance belt is prohibited. Male dancers are allowed to perform bare-chested

6.2.1 Belly Dance / Oriental Possible to use integral dress or special bra with a skirt (with or without belt) Upper Body – Forbidden to use open bra – The distance between the bra cups should not be more than 5 cm

Lower Body – Lower part of costume should be a skirt (slit skirt or simple skirt) – Fitting the lower part of the costume should ensure the cover of the vertical line of the buttocks. – Buttocks and Pubic area must be covered with cloth material – In case of the lower part of the costume (skirt) made with see-through or lace materials, the intimate parts must be covered with special panties. – The panties should cover the entire buttock in the back. In the front, the panty line should follow the line between the body and the flexed leg. The distance from the hip line to the panty line should be at least 5 centimetres (2 inches) when measure from the side (pants must cover buttocks and pubic area). – Abbreviated bikini bottoms, thongs, thong appliqués and any shorts imitating a thong look are prohibited. The dancers should make sure their costumes fit properly, as ill-fitting shorts or panties can wedge or otherwise expose the buttock in a way that is prohibited. – The panties must have the same color as the costume. Panties made with skin colored, lace or net materials are forbidden. – A dance costume should not be associated with a beach suit and/or underwear. – In case of a slit skirt, the slit should start not higher than at a distance of 10 cm from the iliac bones.

6.2.2 Oriental Folk The costume should completely correspond to the chosen style. When choosing a costume design, one should follow the general restrictions on costumes (item 6.2). The folk costume should not look open, therefore these elements are not recommended: – High slits (above the middle of the hip) – See-through or lace materials (in case of its use, a costume must have a not see-through lining)

6.2.3 Oriental Show costume can be of any type, but it must comply with the general rules of costumes, including all the restrictions (item 6.2)

6.2.4 Age Restrictions: Costumes and Image Juniors: Juniors should always be dressed age-appropriately and their image should be that of a junior and not that of an adult. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: “adult” costumes; high slits; see-through or skin colored materials. Adults: Adult dancers should bear in mind that they are the ones setting the trend for the younger dancers, who look up to them and seek inspiration from them. This is why it is very important to be dressed in a good taste. Seniors: When choosing a costume for Seniors, should be considered the physiological characteristics, as well as the moral component of the image of dancers of “elegant” age. Therefore, these elements are not recommended: high slits; see -through or net materials.

  1. Dancer’s Number

7.1 For dancers in the show and folk categories it is not necessary to affix their assigned number to their costume.

7.2 For all quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in all categories it is not necessary to affix the competitor’s assigned number to their costume.

7.3 Master of Ceremonies is required to: in quarter-final, semi-final and final competition announce the competitor’s number and full name. For quarter-final, semi-final and final competition in Belly Dance/Oriental Solos, Duos, Groups and Formations – the name of the ensemble or pseudonym (stage name) is sufficient, as it is in Oriental Folk Dance and Oriental Show Dance. 8. Competitors During their Performance 8.1 In Duo, Group, Formation categories all dancers have to stay on the dance floor during the whole performance from the beginning of composition until the end. 9. All dancers have to be ready to dance 30 minutes before their start time and they must give their music to the sound engineer at least 60 minutes prior to the start time. 10. Safety 10.1 It is forbidden to use an open flame, liquids or other substances that may leave the floor wet, damage the stage surface or make it unsafe.

10.2. It is forbidden to use live animals.

  1. Notes for the Organizers When organizing a BELLY DANCE event it is necessary to:

11.1 Ensure that the dance surface is kept clean.

11.2 It is the Organizer’s responsibility to ensure that during the preliminaries for the Adult categories the compulsory music is changed for each heat so that all competitors have equal opportunity for improvising.

11.3 After the semi-final results have been announced for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 a break of at least 15 minutes should be provided so the finalists may change their costumes and music be prepared for the final.

11.4 Provide videotaping of the semi-final and final rounds for the age divisions Adult 1 and Adults 2 category in order to check that the rules have been followed with regard to the mandatory change of costume and choreography. 1

FLAMENCO

The categories in Flamenco are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

  1. SOLO PERFORMERS
  2. Solo performers represent one dance on a competition.
  3. Duration of dance up to 3 minutes
  4. The dance can be both in “puro” style, and in a modern direction of flamenco – “fusion”.
  5. Use of additional subjects is allowed.
  6. Participation in dance of supernumeraries or dancers of the second plan is forbidden.

Costumes:

  1. Performers dance in any flamenco dress.
  2. Dance may be performed in trousers if that is demanded by staging. 3. Additional accessories are allowed.
  3. DUOS Duo will be danced by female/female, male/female or male/male – The first round will be organizer’s music to Sevillanas for 1 to 1:15 minutes. The duo can choose one of the 4 parts of the Sevillanas. – The second round for those who have passed to the next round then do a performance to music of their own choice, which can be no longer than 3:30 and no less than 2:30. DUO Costume Regulations 1. First Round – Costumes should be identical for both dancers (an identical style, color, quantity of frill- son a skirt, etc.) – Additional accessories are allowed.
  4. Second Round – Costumes of dancers can be either in identical style, or differ in details. For example, an identical style of top, different skirts, different breed of a dress. – Absolutely different dresses are forbidden. – Dresses should be one style. – Accessories are allowed.
  5. GROUPS The group consist of 3 to 7 competitors. Competitors can present any dance, in any direction of flamenco – “puro”, “fusion”. The time limits: The first round can be no less than 2:30 and not longer than 3:30. In the final round the time limit is raised to 4:30 with a minimum of 2:30. Sevillianas may be used in Small Group.
  6. FORMATION Formations consist of 8 to 24 competitors The dance-group represents one number in any direction of flamenco, with additional subjects, or without them. The same rules will apply as for Group, but the final round will be increased to 5:00. In the Children’s division the limit will be 3:00 minimum and 4:00 maximum.
  7. Group and Formation Costume Regulations · Dresses should be presented in one style. · Distinctions in details of a dress are possible. · Additional accessories are allowed. · Use of man’s suits, at presentation of dance by girls, is allowed. The costume must fit the type of dance they are doing. Hand props may be used such as castanets, fans, Bolero hats and canes. Characteristic: The majority of the dance must be traditional Flamenco to Flamenco music. Deviations from the above must be minor.

BREAK DANCE

The categories of Break Dance are: Solo and Crews. Starting January 1st, 2018 the categories of Break Dance are: Solo Female, Solo Male (B-Boys and B-Girls) and Crews (ADM 2017, Implementation 1.1.2018, no change possible before 2021) Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines. Break Dance is for Juniors and Adults only SOLO 1. Music: Organizer’s music in Break Dance style.

  1. Duration of Performance: Preliminary round: 2 minutes divided into three sections of 40 seconds duration each. Additional opening minute of the 1st round is not evaluated. In the preliminary round, there must be no more than three (3) competitors dancing together. The Chairperson of Adjudicators determines the number of competitors in the opening minute and final 40 seconds in the preliminary round. The best 16 competitors fight in “battles” one by one in a “knock-out-system” (5 – 10 minutes each battle).
  2. Tempo: No restrictions.
  3. Typical Break Dance Elements: Crown, Headspin, Backspin, Turtle, Helicopter, Windmill, Bailey Windmill, Uprock, Freeze, Sixstep, One Hand Up, Swipe, Atomic, Flair, Holoback, Traxx, 99, variable footwork, etc., including different variations of these figures, elements and movements. Keen ‘breaks’ (stopping of movement), isolations, breaking movements, plus acrobatic movements in various combinations are all expected aspects of Break Dance routines. Technical difficulty of performed elements, joining of elements (flowing acrobatic movements melding into one another), originality, etc. are all highly important, and the entire presentation will be evaluated NOTE: It is important to show more than two different figures and elements. Figures danced twice are only counted once. If repeated, the best attempt of the two will be marked.
  4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions for Street Dance.
  5. Forbidden Movements: Elements and figures that, according to the dancer’s ability, are too difficult or that could lead to injuries or loss of life.
  6. Stage Props: As applicable for this discipline. For Teams it is also allowed to use requisites. 8. Break Dance competitions are not organized in the Children age division. 9. Procedure of Break Dance solo competition a. FIRST/PRELIMINARY ROUND: Each group of competitors begins dancing together in the preliminary round with a one-minute ‘warm up’ performance, which the Adjudicators do not evaluate. They then dance (not more than 3) first 40 seconds period. When all dancers finish, they start to perform the 2nd period of 40 seconds in the same order. The final performance gives the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor during the final presentations. Best 16 competitors will be qualified and continue with battles (knock out system).

QUALIFICATION: If there are 18 dancers or more in the 1st round, Adjudicators should qualify the best 16. In the first round, the Adjudicators evaluate each dancer with the points from 1 to 10. Criteria for the points are:

  • bad- none of the elements are performed in correct way, out of music
  • 2- bad- one or two elements are performed correct but out of music
  • 3- not bad- dancer is performing weak, choreography is poor
  • 4- not bad- dancer is performing various elements or style
  • 5- satisfactory- dancer is performing various elements or style, but there is no fluidity or is repeating the same element two or more time
  • 6- good- dancer is performing various elements and style, there is not enough power or image is poor
  • 7- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but with the small mistakes
  • 8- very good- dancer is performing the elements and style correctly, but losing the power
  • 9- excellent- dancer is using different styles and performing various elements on a very high level
  • 10- outstanding- dancer is using different styles, performing various elements and bringing personal note in performance Following the given points Adjudicators will give A, B, C, D letters and additionally X’s, for those that they want into the next round. The Scrutineers count each given letter with the points. The points are given in the following manner: A- 4 points, B- 3 points, C- 2 points, D- 1 point. The cross is counted as 0.5 point. The dancers are sorted out for the next round (spider) by the total amount of points that comes from the given letters and crosses. In case of tie the Scrutineer will use the following rule for the start numbers in tie: first, the number of letters will be counted (C and D for one start number is better than B) and if the tie cannot be broken the given points from all Adjudicators (1-10) will be used in order to select the dancers for the next round. If it is not possible to select the start numbers for the next round after procedure explained in 1 and 2, then the actual redance will be organized by giving the points from 1-10 and letters that are needed for the next round.
  1. BATTLES: In the 8 battles that follow, the dancers from A class will battle with dancers from D class, and dancers from B class will battle with dancers from C class (1st in a ranking from group A with last from group D, etc.). Neither dancers, nor Adjudicators will be informed who belongs to which class, only Scrutineer and Supervisor (Chairperson of Adjudicators) will be informed. List of battles will be published. After 8 battles, those who are winners will battle in the next 4 battles, and afterwards in last two for 4th and 3rd as well as for 2nd and 1st place. All Adjudicators´ decisions must be also in written form (made by Scrutineer and the Chairperson of Adjudicators.) If there is no clear majority in the break dance battles (crossed arms), one more round (one entrance of each) will be done. After the additional round (entrance), Adjudicators have to clearly decide about their choice, showing the hand to the dancer they would like to see as a winner. Adjudicators have to use the given Adjudicators sheet who they would like to see in the next round. The Adjudicators then show the hand to a dancer following the judging sheet. The Chairperson and Scrutineer control the showing of hands.

 

CREW BATTLES

 

  1. Number of Dancers: 3-7
  2. Music: Teams = Crews may use their own music in the first round. Organizer’s music in Break Dance Style will be used in the final round.
  3. Duration of Performance in the first round (Show): 150-180 seconds (2:30 – 3:00 minutes) of each team’s/crew´s performance may be danced using the team’s/ crew´s music. In case that the music is too long or short the crew will be disqualified. The “Semifinal-Battle” (3. and 4. place) will last about 5 – 10 minutes. The “Final-Battle” 10 – 15 (20) minutes, according to the Supervisors decision. The last minute will be announced.
  4. Tempo: No restrictions.
  5. Typical Break Dance Elements: Same as for Break Dance Solos, plus: Acrobatics should have some style continuation. Choreography for the exhibition to the team’s own music must be a clear performance of a team, not just a demonstration of unrelated solo performances. Musicality, difficulty of movements and figures, originality and team variability will all be highly evaluated. Synchronized movements, shadow standing, mirror positions and smooth transitions of these components from one into another, along with choreographic variability and work with space will also be evaluated. All typical elements of Break Dance should be performed – Styles – Pop Locking – Power moves – Electric Boogie.
  6. If one crew disturbs another team’s performance or endangers another team’s safety, a loss of evaluation points will result.
  7. The final ‘battle’ portion of each contest shall consist of individual performances of dancers from the competing crews in which each dancer must dance his or her solo part at least one time, and the crew´s performance will be Adjudicatord as a whole.
  8. Based on the first round results, the Chairperson of Adjudicators will determine the order of “battles” between 1st – 2nd ranked crews and the 3rd – 4th ranked crews.
  9. All other rules are as outlined under Break Dance Solo.
  10. Procedure of Break Dance Team competition First round is a show of crews who will dance to their own music. The Adjudicators will evaluate and select the four best crews. The Adjudicators give the best crew 4 points (A), the next best crew 3 points (B), the next best crew 2 points (C) and the next best crew 1 point (D) .Only the 4 best crews will battle to the Organizer’s music (3rd against 4th and 1st against 2nd). If there are more than 8 crews in the 1st=preliminary round, a Supervisor together with a Chairperson of Adjudicators may decide to ask for additional crosses for crew/crews on the next position after 4 best crews (cross means placement). Special note for Break Dance and Electric Boogie: When asked to select Adjudicators for this discipline, each nation should only invite Adjudicators who are very experienced in Break Dance and Electric Boogie. This type of VIP Adjudicator would include past champions, celebrity performers, teachers and choreographers who are all considered experts in this field. This note is intended as a guideline only, and is not a rule.

 

ELECTRIC BOOGIE

The categories of Electric Boogie are: Solo, Duo. Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Street Dance Disciplines.

  1. Duration of Performance: Organizer ’s music 1 minute in all rounds, including the final round.
  2. Tempo: Solos 30-32,5 bars per minute (120-130 beats per minute). Duos 31-32,5 bars p.M. (124-130 bpm)
  3. Typical Movements and Techniques: Sharp electric movements that flow into waves, isolations, robot, pantomime elements, popping, animation, electric shock, walking, puppet, ticking, locking, etc. It is important to show more than two different techniques and movements.
  4. The dancer(s) should endeavor to create illusions in his or her performance to surprise and ‘electrify’ the audience.
  5. Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adults Duos.
  6. Stage Props: are allowed, such as masks, glasses, hats etc. – but NO requisites!! Each group of competitors begins with a one-minute performance, dancing together in each round. They then dance three, two or one by one for their one-minute performance or 1 minute performance in the final round. Each group dances a final minute together in each round. To avoid any risk of injuries, Adjudicators shall walk around the competition floor in opening and final presentations. Both the opening and final performance give the Adjudicators an opportunity to compare the dancers.

1-ВА СЕКЦИЯ КОНКУРС:

танцови дисциплини

В раздел „Конкурс“ – Участват танцьори от Div. A и Div. B
 
Show Dance
Modern and Contemporary Dance
Acrobatic Dance
Jazz Dance
Ballet – Duos, Groups, Formations
Ballet Open Classical – Solo Female, Solo male
Ballet Repertoire – Solo Female, Solo male
Performing Arts ImprovisationSolo Junior1, Junior2, Adult
Hip Hop
Latin Style
Latin Show

възрастови групи

– Възрастови категории: Соло, Дует, Двойки
• Малки деца – 7 години и под (родени през 2017, 2018, 2019 ….)

• Деца 1: 8 години – 10 години (родени в 2014, 2015, 2016)
• Деца 2: 11 години -12 години – (родени в 2012, 2013)
• Юноши и Девойки 1: 13 години – 14 години (родени в 2011, 2010,)
• Юноши и Девойки 2: 15 години – 16 години (родени в 2009, 2008)
• Визрастни 1: 17 години и над (родени в 2007, 2006, 2005…)
• Възрастни 2: 31 години и над (родени през 1993 и преди)
• Сеньори 50 години и над (роден през 1974, 1973, 1972…)

– Възрастови категории: Отбори, Групи и Формации
• Малки деца – 7 години и под (родени през 2017, 2018, 2019 ….)
• Деца 8 години – 12 години – (родени в 2012, 2013, 2014…)
• Юноши 13 години – 16 години (родени в 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011)
• Визрастни 1: 17 години и над (родени в 2007, 2006, 2005…)
• Възрастни 2: 31 години и над (родени през 1993 и преди)
• Сеньори 50 години и над: Belly Dance/Oriental (роден през 1974, 1973, 1972…)

DANCE DISCIPLINES

In the Competition section – dancers from Div.A and Div.B participate.
 
Show Dance
Modern and Contemporary Dance
Acrobatic Dance
Jazz Dance
Ballet – Duos, Groups, Formations
Ballet Open Classical – Solo Female, Solo male
Ballet Repertoire – Solo Female, Solo male
Performing Arts ImprovisationSolo Junior1, Junior2, Adult
Hip Hop
Latin Style
Latin Show

age divisions

– AGE divisions in SOLO, DUO, COUPLE:
• Mini Kids: 7 years and under – (born in 2017, 2018, 2019 ….)

• Children 1: 8 years – 10 years – (born in 2014, 2015, 2016)
• Children 2: 11 years -12 years- (born in 2012, 2013)
• Junior 1: 13 years – 14 years – (born in 2011, 2010,)
• Junior 2: 15 years – 16 years (born in 2009, 2008)
• Adult 1: 17 years and over – (born in 2007, 2006, 2005…)
• Adult 2: 31 years and over (born in 1993 and before)
• Senior / Seniors: 50 years. and over – (born in 1974, 1973, 1972…)

– Age Divisions Categories: Teams, Groups, and Formations
• Mini Kids: 7 years and under – (born in, 2017, 2018, 2019…)
• Children: 8 years – 12 years – (born in 2012, 2013, 2014…)
• Junior: 13 years – 16 years – (born in 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011)
• Adult 1: 17 years and over – (born in 2007, 2006, 2005…)
• Adult 2: 31 and over (born in 1993 and before) • Seniors: 50 years and over Belly Dance/Oriental (born in 1974, 1973, 1972…)

STAGE PROPS

Permitted in many Performing Arts disciplines. However, Stage Props must be carried by the dancer(s) in one trip. Stagehands / assistants are not allowed to carry props for the dancer(s).

NOTE: Cumbersome scenic props are not permitted in any dance, category, style or division at any IDO Event.

Hand Props are anything carried with the hands and not part of the costume (bells, flags, cane, umbrella, etc.).

Floor Props are the same, objects set on the floor (chairs, stairs, ladders, tables, etc.).

Scenic Backgrounds and Backdrops (scenic curtains or flats – scenery).

 Props, liquids shoes, costumes or other substances that can litter, damage, or make the dance floor / stage unsafe may not be used in any discipline.

 NOTE: This means that the use of such props, liquids, shoes, costumes or other substances will be punished with a warning and/or direct disqualification.

Using electrical devices, such as personal light effects and music which the dancer plugs into an electric socket – props, may be used but must be powered by battery.

SCENIC SET UP AND BREAK DOWN

Scenic backgrounds and floor props must take no longer than 15 seconds to set up and 15 seconds to carry it away in Solo, Duo, Trio and 25 seconds in Group entries. Formations will be allowed 45 seconds to set up and 45 seconds to take it off the stage. Time will begin as soon as the first piece of scenic material touches the stage and in taking it off, as soon as the last piece is off the stage. This rule applies to all Performing Arts disciplines. The rule regarding dancers carrying the props in one trip, on and off, will remain the same.

DURATION OF PERFORMANCE

CATEGORY MINIMUM Time Duration MAXIMUM Time Duration

Solos, Duos, Trio (Tap only): MINIMUM Time Duration – 1 minute & 45 seconds (1:45) – MAXIMUM Time Duration 2 minutes & 15 seconds (2:15)

Ballet solo!!! – MINIMUM Time Duration 1 minute in Ballet solo  – MAXIMUM Time Duration 

2 minutes & 15 seconds (2:15)

Groups : MINIMUM Time Duration 2 minutes & 30 seconds – MAXIMUM Time Duration (2:30) 3 minutes (3:00)

Formations: MINIMUM Time Duration 2 minutes & 30 seconds  – MAXIMUM Time Duration (2:30)  – 4 minutes (4:00)

Production: MINIMUM Time Duration – 5 minutes – MAXIMUM Time Duration –  8 minutes

Children’s Formation will be 2:30 minimum and 3:00 maximum in Performing Arts, except Belly Dance and Flamenco Dance.

The time limit for all Productions is 8 minutes maximum, which will allow the opportunity to have a final with 3

LIFTS

Lifts are defined as movements / figures in which both feet of one dancer are off the floor and such figures /
movements are performed with the help / physical support of another person.

Lifts are permitted in some, but not all dance disciplines. Please refer to specific rules for the discipline in question.

Lifts are NOT permitted in Children’s divisions.

 Exception:

 Jumps in one hand-hold are not considered as a lift.

 Forbidden elements for Mini kids and Children age divisions: 
– Elements, stands on head are not allowed.
– Movements where most of weight is carried by another dancer are not allowed. 
– Any kind of jumps from the props at the height of more than 1 meter are not allowed. 
– Toe work in Tap Dance, all IDO disciplines.
– Pointe work in Ballet, all IDO disciplines.

Special NOTE for Productions: 

For Mini kids and Children the rules above are not applicable when competing in Productions. All elements carried out/performed are on their own risk.

ACROBATIC MOVEMENTS

Acrobatics are those movements, in which body overturns round sagittal or frontal axis, such as somersaults, hand wheeling and similar figures.

These movements are permitted in some, but not all disciplines. Please refer to specific rules for the discipline in question.

If permitted, acrobatic movements will not always enhance the dancer’s score, and could even detract from the score if they are not performed in a technically correct manner.

In all disciplines where applicable, in Children and Mini Kids age divisions acrobatics are allowed if a body part is touching the floor. Acrobatics must not dominate the routine.

 In Children and Mini age division, all acrobatics must be performed without any physical support of a dancer, dancers.

SPECIAL NOTE FOR ROUTINE RESTRICTIONS

No dance routine shall be performed in more than one discipline.

Example: The same routine cannot be performed in both a Jazz and Show Dance, nor can a Modern piece be performed in both a Modern and Ballet event.

SPECIAL RULE FOR COSTUMES

In Jazz/Lyrical, Modern and Contemporary Dance, Ballet, Tap Dance and Show Dance disciplines dancers will not be allowed to change their costume during a performance or competition, unless it is ordered because of an infraction of the Costume Rules. It will also not be allowed to change the music or choreography in the next or final round.

SPECIAL RULES FOR THE CHILDREN AGE DIVISION

Dark themes, costumes, and music are not permitted in the Children and Mini Kids Age Divisions

OTHER RULES

Competitors who are not present on stage to dance following the starting order, without a valid reason, will be disqualified by the Chairperson of the Adjudicators.

2-РА СЕКЦИЯ ФЕСТИВАЛ

танцови дисциплини

В раздел „Фестивал“ – Участват танцьори от Div. A, Div. B and Div. C
• Open Show Dance

• Acro Gymnastics Show

• Dance

• Open Lyrical Dance

• Neoclassics

• Tap Dance

• Character – Ethnic – Folk

• Ethnic Show

• Folklore Dance

• Folk Dance Show

• Oriental Folk Dance

• Show Belly Dance

• Belly Dance/Oriental

• Production

• Bollywood

• Bollywood Show Dance

• Flamenco

• Light Dance Show

• Disco Dance

• Disco Dance Free Style

• Disco Show – Group, Formation.

• IDO Disco Slow – Solo Male, Solo Female

• Hip Hop Solo and Crew Battle

• Popping – Solo, Duo.

• Street Dance Show

• K-POP

• MTV Dance

• Argentine Tango

• Salsa

• Merengue

• Bachata

• Caribbean Dances are Salsa, Bachata, and Merengue

• Salsa Rueda de Casino Teams and Formations

• Caribbean Show

• Couple Dance Formations

• All Ladies Latin

• FIT KID

• Synchro Dance

• Musical Dance

• Musical with Singing

• Zumba Show Dance

• TikTok Show Dance

• Majorette Show Dance

• Maiorette with Pompons

• Majorette with Batons

• Cheerleaders

възрастови групи

– Възрастови категории: Соло, Дует, Двойки, Отбори, Групи и Формации
• Малки деца – 7 години и под (родени през 2017, 2018, 2019 ….)
• Деца 8 години – 12 години – (родени в 2012, 2013, 2014…)
• Юноши 13 години – 16 години (родени в 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011)
• Визрастни 1: 17 години и над (родени в 2007, 2006, 2005…)
• Възрастни 2: 31 години и над (родени през 1993 и преди)
• Сеньори 50 години и над: Belly Dance/Oriental (роден през 1974, 1973, 1972…)

DANCE DISCIPLINES

In the Competition section – dancers from Div.A and Div.B participate.
 
Show Dance
Modern and Contemporary Dance
Acrobatic Dance
Jazz Dance
Ballet – Duos, Groups, Formations
Ballet Open Classical – Solo Female, Solo male
Ballet Repertoire – Solo Female, Solo male
Performing Arts ImprovisationSolo Junior1, Junior2, Adult
Hip Hop
Latin Style
Latin Show

age divisions

– AGE divisions in SOLO, DUO, COUPLE:
• Mini Kids: 7 years and under – (born in 2017, 2018, 2019 ….)

• Children 1: 8 years – 10 years – (born in 2014, 2015, 2016)
• Children 2: 11 years -12 years- (born in 2012, 2013)
• Junior 1: 13 years – 14 years – (born in 2011, 2010,)
• Junior 2: 15 years – 16 years (born in 2009, 2008)
• Adult 1: 17 years and over – (born in 2007, 2006, 2005…)
• Adult 2: 31 years and over (born in 1993 and before)
• Senior / Seniors: 50 years. and over – (born in 1974, 1973, 1972…)

– Age Divisions Categories: Teams, Groups, and Formations
• Mini Kids: 7 years and under – (born in, 2017, 2018, 2019…)
• Children: 8 years – 12 years – (born in 2012, 2013, 2014…)
• Junior: 13 years – 16 years – (born in 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011)
• Adult 1: 17 years and over – (born in 2007, 2006, 2005…)
• Adult 2: 31 and over (born in 1993 and before) • Seniors: 50 years and over Belly Dance/Oriental (born in 1974, 1973, 1972…)

STAGE PROPS

Permitted in many Performing Arts disciplines. However, Stage Props must be carried by the dancer(s) in one trip. Stagehands / assistants are not allowed to carry props for the dancer(s).

NOTE: Cumbersome scenic props are not permitted in any dance, category, style or division at any IDO Event.

Hand Props are anything carried with the hands and not part of the costume (bells, flags, cane, umbrella, etc.).

Floor Props are the same, objects set on the floor (chairs, stairs, ladders, tables, etc.).

Scenic Backgrounds and Backdrops (scenic curtains or flats – scenery).

 Props, liquids shoes, costumes or other substances that can litter, damage, or make the dance floor / stage unsafe may not be used in any discipline.

 NOTE: This means that the use of such props, liquids, shoes, costumes or other substances will be punished with a warning and/or direct disqualification.

Using electrical devices, such as personal light effects and music which the dancer plugs into an electric socket – props, may be used but must be powered by battery.

SCENIC SET UP AND BREAK DOWN

Scenic backgrounds and floor props must take no longer than 15 seconds to set up and 15 seconds to carry it away in Solo, Duo, Trio and 25 seconds in Group entries. Formations will be allowed 45 seconds to set up and 45 seconds to take it off the stage. Time will begin as soon as the first piece of scenic material touches the stage and in taking it off, as soon as the last piece is off the stage. This rule applies to all Performing Arts disciplines. The rule regarding dancers carrying the props in one trip, on and off, will remain the same.

DURATION OF PERFORMANCE

CATEGORY MINIMUM Time Duration MAXIMUM Time Duration

Solos, Duos, Trio (Tap only): MINIMUM Time Duration – 1 minute & 45 seconds (1:45) – MAXIMUM Time Duration 2 minutes & 15 seconds (2:15)

Ballet solo!!! – MINIMUM Time Duration 1 minute in Ballet solo  – MAXIMUM Time Duration 

2 minutes & 15 seconds (2:15)

Groups : MINIMUM Time Duration 2 minutes & 30 seconds – MAXIMUM Time Duration (2:30) 3 minutes (3:00)

Formations: MINIMUM Time Duration 2 minutes & 30 seconds  – MAXIMUM Time Duration (2:30)  – 4 minutes (4:00)

Production: MINIMUM Time Duration – 5 minutes – MAXIMUM Time Duration –  8 minutes

Children’s Formation will be 2:30 minimum and 3:00 maximum in Performing Arts, except Belly Dance and Flamenco Dance.

The time limit for all Productions is 8 minutes maximum, which will allow the opportunity to have a final with 3

LIFTS

Lifts are defined as movements / figures in which both feet of one dancer are off the floor and such figures /
movements are performed with the help / physical support of another person.

Lifts are permitted in some, but not all dance disciplines. Please refer to specific rules for the discipline in question.

Lifts are NOT permitted in Children’s divisions.

 Exception:

 Jumps in one hand-hold are not considered as a lift.

 Forbidden elements for Mini kids and Children age divisions: 
– Elements, stands on head are not allowed.
– Movements where most of weight is carried by another dancer are not allowed. 
– Any kind of jumps from the props at the height of more than 1 meter are not allowed. 
– Toe work in Tap Dance, all IDO disciplines.
– Pointe work in Ballet, all IDO disciplines.

Special NOTE for Productions: 

For Mini kids and Children the rules above are not applicable when competing in Productions. All elements carried out/performed are on their own risk.

ACROBATIC MOVEMENTS

Acrobatics are those movements, in which body overturns round sagittal or frontal axis, such as somersaults, hand wheeling and similar figures.

These movements are permitted in some, but not all disciplines. Please refer to specific rules for the discipline in question.

If permitted, acrobatic movements will not always enhance the dancer’s score, and could even detract from the score if they are not performed in a technically correct manner.

In all disciplines where applicable, in Children and Mini Kids age divisions acrobatics are allowed if a body part is touching the floor. Acrobatics must not dominate the routine.

 In Children and Mini age division, all acrobatics must be performed without any physical support of a dancer, dancers.

SPECIAL NOTE FOR ROUTINE RESTRICTIONS

No dance routine shall be performed in more than one discipline.

Example: The same routine cannot be performed in both a Jazz and Show Dance, nor can a Modern piece be performed in both a Modern and Ballet event.

SPECIAL RULE FOR COSTUMES

In Jazz/Lyrical, Modern and Contemporary Dance, Ballet, Tap Dance and Show Dance disciplines dancers will not be allowed to change their costume during a performance or competition, unless it is ordered because of an infraction of the Costume Rules. It will also not be allowed to change the music or choreography in the next or final round.

SPECIAL RULES FOR THE CHILDREN AGE DIVISION

Dark themes, costumes, and music are not permitted in the Children and Mini Kids Age Divisions

OTHER RULES

Competitors who are not present on stage to dance following the starting order, without a valid reason, will be disqualified by the Chairperson of the Adjudicators.

PERFORMING ARTS DANCE DISCIPLINES:

SHOW DANCE

The categories in Show Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

Adult division duo is divided in two categories:

DUO female-female

DUO male-female or duo male-male

The dancer must only be represented in either two females, two males or male/female in any given competition.

Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

1. DEFINITION OF SHOW DANCE

Show Dance in the broadest sense is based either on any Jazz/Lyrical, Ballet and/or Modern and Contemporary dance technique. Other dance disciplines can also be incorporated but cannot dominate.

Ballroom, Latin or Rock ’n’ Roll are excluded and cannot be performed. Show Dance allows the use of lifts (except for Children), acrobatics, props, lip-sync and other theatrical effects. An IDO Show Dance number always has to have a guideline, story or visible concept to entertain the audience.

2. When movements and elements of other IDO dance disciplines such as Disco Dance, Hip-Hop, Electric Boogie, Break Dance and Tap, or when American & International Ballroom and Latin Dance is used in the performance, such movements / styles should not control / dominate the performance.

3. The dancer’s personal interpretation should be clearly evident when using any of these disciplines or styles.

4. Acrobatic Movements: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts. Acrobatic movements will be evaluated under show criteria and must never dominate and must be in harmony with the idea or theme. If modern gymnastic movements dominates a performance a significantly reduction of points in the technique dimension should be the consequence. (see in General Rules Performing Arts under Acrobatic Movements restriction for Children)

5. Lifts: Permitted as outlined in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age division.

6. Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.

7. Musicality, variety of dance and patterns, originality, total performance and individual choreography will be evaluated. It is very important to present harmony of idea, music, dance, choreography, costume and props in the presentation, as the entire image will be used in evaluating the performance.

8. Formations will be Adjudicatord as a whole. Solo, duo or ensemble parts may be performed, but must not dominate.

9. All Show Dance presentations shall be based on a concept, story, theme or idea. There must be a title of the Show. The concept, story, theme or idea must be fully understandable and will be expressed by means of dance movements that adhere to the piece being presented, along with being creative, imaginative and original. The piece must have Show Value, as explained in (Section Protocol and Judging Procedure in the IDO Official´s Book).

https://www.ido-dance.com/ceis/ido/rules/competitionRules/danceSportRules.pdf

JAZZ DANCE/LYRICAL

The categories of Jazz Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Jazz Dance Styles:

Primitive: This dance form stemmed from early African Folk Dances that were done by slaves brought to America from Africa, West Indies, Cuba, Panama and Haiti.

Early: Originated via the music of the late 1800’s and early 1900’s. Dances included the Two-Step or Cakewalk, and later became the Grizzly Bear, Bunny Hug, Turkey Trot, and Texas Tommy. This evolved into the fast music and dances of the 1920’s, the One-Step, Lindy Hop, Charleston and Black Bottom.

Musical Comedy / Theatre Jazz: These forms of Jazz became very popular via movies / theatre during the 1930s and 1940s. Many dance forms were incorporated in Musical Comedy Jazz. Ballet with “On Your Toes”, and Modern Dance in “Oklahoma” and “Brigadoon”. During the 1950s and 1960s, dance became an integral part of telling the story in Musical Theatre, as illustrated in musicals such as “Flower Drum Song”, “Destry Rides Again”, “West Side Story” and “Seven Brides for Seven Brothers”. In 1978, the musical “Dancing” showed that the songs and books were secondary to the dancing; in fact, they are almost non-existent.

Contemporary: Primarily performed to music of the day, it began in the late 1950s to the music of Contemporary Jazz musicians like Dizzy Gillespie, Art Tatum and Dave Brubeck.

Today’s Jazz Dance: This discipline may be danced using many different styles and tempos, using themes based on Afro-Cuban, Oriental, Spanish or other national themes. It may be performed as a character, such as Cowboy, Sailor, Clown, etc. It may also be abstract in nature. Lyrical Jazz, performed to such music as Bette Midler’s “Wind Beneath My Wings”, may be included in Jazz Dance Discipline

NOTE: Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Jazz Dance, and may not compete in this discipline.

Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Jazz Dance performances.

1. Characteristics and Movement: Jazz Dance is a multi-faceted art form. The above-mentioned types of Jazz Dance are examples of what is permissible in this category.

2. The music choice can also be acapella (no music), but the beginning and ending of performance must be marked with clear audible sound (beep). 

3. The entire routine must consist of Jazz work. Jazz technique, turns, jumps isolations, stretch, as well as use of port de bras, legs and upper body. Timing and rhythm will be considered in marking. Suitable footwear must be worn.

4. Acrobatic Movements: In Jazz Dance limited acrobatics will be allowed as long as a body part is  touching the floor or a dancer in duo/ group/formation has a partner support. (Junior and Adult  Age Division) Acrobatics should not dominate the routine.

5. Lifts: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions in Adult and Junior divisions.

NOTE: Lifts are NOT permitted in the Children’s age divisions.

6. Stage Props: Hand, stage and floor props will be allowed under the following conditions:

Clothing: All costume accessories, such as hats, scarves, gloves, belts, etc., may be worn if they are an integral part of the costume. They may be taken off, exchanged or discarded, but not left to litter the stage. Meaning, the dancer cannot leave the stage at the end of the routine leaving clothing behind. If a dancer discards or drops a scarf on the state, they must pick it up and take it off when they leave.

Hand Props: All hand props such as canes, umbrellas, hand bags, brief cases, mirrors, flags, etc., maybe used as long as they are an integral part and used throughout the routine. They may be set down on the floor as long as it remains part of the routine and picked up when leaving the stage at the end of the routine. Hand props can never be used as floor props. In other words, you cannot enter the stage with an umbrella, set it on the floor, dance your entire routine without utilizing the umbrella and then pick it up at the end of the routine and leave the stage.

Floor Props: Necessary floor props such as a chair, stool, box, ladder, etc., may be carried on by a dancer in one trip, but must be an integral part of the routine and utilized throughout the entire performance. Items used to decorate or embellish the stage are not permitted. The dancer must carry the floor prop off the state at the end of the routine.

Scenic or stage props: Any items such as a scenic background, back drop, tree or other such prop, used to create a scene or embellish the stage are not permitted.

7. Lip-sync is not allowed in Jazz Dance.

Show Dance VS Jazz

The difference between Show Dance and Jazz is very difficult, but not impossible, to define. Jazz Dance styles range from the early 1920s to the present, and most Jazz Dance pieces are created using pure dance without consideration to theme or story. This is an ever -evolving Performing Art dance, and one could very readily argue the point that all of the Street dances contain some elements of Jazz. How do we draw the line between Jazz and Street Dance? Definitely the music. The music dictates the style. Does that mean that Hip-Hop or Break Dance music cannot be used in a Jazz piece? No, because the style of the dance dictates what discipline it actually is.

Therefore, a Jazz Dance piece can be done to Hip-Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie music, but never a Hip-Hop, Break Dance or Electric Boogie to Jazz music. Since there is no specific style of music identifiable as Jazz Dance or Show Dance, music cannot be used to determine if the discipline is correct. However: the difference in styles can be used to make this determination.

Although Show Dance pieces may be based on a theme or story, there are many variables that exist. A Show Dance piece can be based on emotions, color and design, or even one word, such as ‘devastation’ or ‘jubilation.’ Jazz Dance does not have to convey any of the above criteria, and may be done based on pure dance only. For instance, a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ might be based on movement formation, color and costume. Another piece danced to the same or different music might be built on a theme of floating dancers, be enhanced by costume de- sign and originality, and feature terrific use of the music. Would a piece danced to ‘Bolero’ do well in a Jazz Dance competition? The answer to that would be in the eyes of the beholder, but a strong Jazz Dance piece would certainly give such a piece a run for its money if the former was not based on true Jazz technique.

Lyric or Modern may be the base technique for either Show Dance or Jazz Dance. It all depends on how much of a ‘show’ the piece really is. A straight lyric piece, performed in a Show Dance division to Whitney Houston, without a theme or story line, would not do very well, because the show value of the 4-D system would receive a low mark. When judging an IDO competition where the 3-D system of separate evaluations is used for technique, composition and image, the show quality of the routine may enter into all three of these separate dimensions. The ability to use technique to enhance the theme or story being told is very important. The choreography and the way the dancer performs it must be of show quality, and the image that the dancer creates is also very important to the show value of a given piece. But Adjudicators should not be influenced by the show value of a Jazz Dance routine. Their marks for technique should be based purely on technique, choreography purely on choreography, and image marks should be based on the total look of the performer.

TAP DANCE

The categories of Tap Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Trio, Group, Formation.

Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

1. Characteristics and Movement: Although the primary emphasis should be on the harmonious blend of the dancer’s footwork (sound), many variables exist. All forms of tap will compete against each other, such as: Rhythm, Hoofing, Buck and Wing, Waltz Clog, Military, Precision Kick Line, Latin and Musical Theater.

2. Jingle taps, double taps or double claques are not permitted.

3. The music must not contain prerecorded taps.

4. Personal amplification devices are not permitted.

5. No more than 30 seconds of a cappella or tacet (silence) may be used in any one routine. The absence of music must occur within the music and not at the beginning or end. “Stop Time” is an open part of a measure of music, not played but silent, with some notes being played. “A Capella” is an open phrase of multiple measures in length, but completely absent (silent) of any/all music.

NOTE: Music must be played at the beginning and end of the music and the A Capella must be no longer than 30 seconds. A Capella can also be defined as “Tacit.”

6. The dancer’s taps and the music must be clearly audible to the audience and adjudicators.

NOTE: The Organizer must make sure the stage has adequate floor microphones and speakers to make this possible.

7. Acrobatic Movements that are an integral part of the routine are permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts, but will not enhance the dancer’s score. (see in General Rules Performing Arts under Acrobatic Movements restriction for Children )

8. Regarding health and safety issues in Tap dance, it is not allowed to dance or perform toe work (dancing on pointe) in the Children’s age division for longer than one beat of music. The definition of this being dancing or standing on the tips of the toes in weight-bearing steps on one or both feet.

Toe work/dancing on pointe will be for no longer than one beat of the music on one or both feet in Children’s Division.

NOTE: No more than one beat and NO weight bearing pointe work at any time. This is stated strictly to clarify the rule already in effect 

LIVE MUSIC during Junior and Adult Groups:

1. This is a separate category and cannot be mixed with other categories.

2. Musicians are not counted as participants unless they also dance in the routine. The ages of the musicians are not relevant unless they are also dancers.

3. The Organizer must be advised by email 4 weeks prior to the event. The email must explain all necessary details. Once approved, the participant must adhere to the agreement.

4. All equipment must be brought in and set up by the Dancers and/or musicians.

5. Set up must be done quickly and in a quiet, non-disruptive manner.

6. The set up and break down of the musical equipment and portable amplification must not take more than 3 minutes.

7. Live music and recorded music can be mixed. In this case, the house system of the Organizer can be used if the entrant can cue the sound engineer of the house system for starts and stops of the recorded music.

For example: If the entry uses amplified live music there can be two different systems:

a. House system for CD and/or up to 2 microphones for vocals only.

b. The entrant may supply additional portable amplification system for live music/vocals.

c. Both systems may be mixed for live music AND recorded music

8. Suggested live music:

Vocals, brass, woodwinds, strings, drums, percussion, bass and keyboards may be used to make music. Full size pianos or organs will not be allowed.

ACROBATIC DANCE

The categories of Acrobatic/ Gymnastic Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Characteristics and Movement: Acrobatic dance shall include many techniques, such as tumbling, balancing, contortions, and aerial tricks without hands and controlled movement, as well as acrobatic elements, static elements, jumps, hand support elements, turns, rolls, walkovers and saltos, all of which should be connected with dance movement and dance combinations. The emphasis is on strength, stretch, control and ease of movement, no matter what technique is being used. 

It is forbidden to form routine on the basic Aerobic and sport Rock’ n ’Roll elements. For safety reasons it is forbidden in all age divisions:

· To perform supports/lifts higher than dancers’ height as well as different throws from hands of other dancer except in the adult division.
· To fall on the knees, stomach and back from the jumping position;
· To begin an acrobatic walkover within flight phase;

– To perform any acrobatic element more than three times (variations are allowed i.e. performance of different forms of the element. For example: cartwheel, one hand cartwheel, cartwheel with transition to the floor, elbow cartwheel etc.).

· To perform headstand (head balance).

Lifts, pyramids, throws: Lifts are permitted in Junior and Adult age divisions

Pyramids are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions. Pyramid is element of artistic, power and plastic acrobatics. It is a group position when dancers supporting each other form complex figures. While performing a pyramid, intended figure shall be fixed for a period of time from 3 to 5 seconds. In Junior age division high unaided pyramids are prohibited.

In Children and Junior age division different throws of one dancer by another are prohibited.

Clothing and decorative elements: Costume rules and regulations see in General Rules in Section 2 of the IDO Rule Book.

For safety reasons it is forbidden to wear decorative elements including earrings, piercing in nose, tongue, navel, face skin. Eye-glasses, hearing devices as well as decorations made of transparent plastic, bracelets, necklaces and pins are also forbidden. All decorations shall be taken off. (Exception: stresses on the dress and temporary tattoos). All accessories, for example hair accessories, shall be tight, and, if possible, soft and flat.

Long hair shall be fastened and taken away from face.

Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Evaluation: Musicality, variety of acrobatic elements and dance itself, originality of composition as well as harmony of concept, music, choreography and acrobatic elements will be highly evaluated.

BALLET

The categories in Ballet are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

Time limit is one (1) minute minimum for male and female solo variations, maximum 2:15 minutes. All other time limits see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

Repertoire Solo Category is added into IDO Ballet Competition.

The ballet category is split into Repertoire Solos and Open Classical Solos .

Characteristics and Movement: Classical Ballet is the most formal of the ballet styles; it adheres to traditional ballet technique. There are variations relating to area of origin, such as Russian ballet, French ballet, British ballet and Italian ballet. The Vaganova method, named after Agrippina Vaganova and the Cecchetti method, named after Enrico Cecchetti are Russian and Italian respectively and derive from the original French method. Classical ballet is best known for its unique features and techniques, such as pointe work, turn-out of the legs, and high extensions; its graceful, flowing, precise movements; and its ethereal qualities. This discipline must be performed using the Classical Ballet Technique and style and may be performed in soft ballet slippers or Pointe shoes. Although choreography may be of a modern nature, it may not deviate from what is commonly known as Classical Ballet. Lyric, Modern and Modern Jazz pieces may not be performed in this discipline.

Adult Division (female dancers) – must dance on en pointe

Pointe work is not allowed in the Children’s category.

Acrobatic Movements: Not permitted in the Ballet discipline.

Lifts: Permitted (and encouraged) as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts. Any lifts used must remain in the Classical Ballet tradition, and may include drop-falls, supported turns and jumps resulting in catches. However, all dances are in a constant evolution and growth, so experimental and original choreography is encouraged.

Stage Props: Permitted as outlined under General Provisions of Performing Arts but dancers cannot use cumbersome scenic material and must carry on and off the stage themselves in one trip.

MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY DANCE

The categories of Modern and Contemporary Dance are: Solo Male, Solo Female, Duo, Group, Formation.

Age Divisions see in General Provisions of Performing Arts.

In the Modern Dance Discipline Mini Kids are not allowed.

Modern dance is an artistic form with many styles that has undergone development over a relatively long period of time.

Modern dance is a more relaxed, free style of dance in which choreographer’s uses emotions and moods to design their own steps, in contrast to ballet’s structured code of steps. It has a deliberate use of gravity, whereas ballet strives to be light and airy 

The development of modern dance was the logical consequence of the dancing styles that existed at the start of the 20th century, when the modern dancers of that period attempted to break free from established ballet forms, which they considered to be stiff, strict and restrictive and therefore they started searching for new trends and techniques to give dance a new direction.

This particular dance discipline concerns using modern dancing techniques that were created for the most part during the first half of the 20th century by renowned dance teachers and choreographers, /e.g. Martha Graham, José Limon, Alvin Ailey, Merce Cunningham, Lester Horton and a host of others on the American continent, and Kurt Jooss, Mary Wigman, Hanya Holm and many others in Europe / In view of the fact that all dance remains in a constant state of movement and development, this does not mean that we have to use only the aforementioned techniques in their original forms. On the contrary, it is also about using contemporary trends in modern dance techniques that either goes back to the foundations established by the aforementioned dance instructors or we can use totally new, experimental and original concepts for modern dance. Contemporary dance brings new information about body and how the body works, offers new quality of movement, new shapes of body in area, brings new composition process and space for experiment.

1. Characteristics and Movement: the entire routine must consist of modern dance techniques and current trends, and should correspond with age divisions and the movement skills of the dancers.

Contemporary Ballet should not be confused with Modern Dance, and may not compete in this discipline. Other contemporary styles such as Hip-Hop, Disco, Break Dance and Electric Boogie may be incorporated, but must never control / dominate Modern dance performances.

The main point of assessment for this discipline will be the level of the dance movements carried out, as well as the theme and story line. The story, the building of a plot, is possible, but not so much emphasized here as, for example, for Show dance. It is primarily about pictures, moods.

In Modern Dance, a story, theme, idea or concept may be used but must always be in good taste for children, junior and adult situations, but human situations, especially those dealing with intimate or personal relationships should acceptable to viewing by all ages.

 2. The music choice can also be acapella (no music), but the beginning and ending of performance  must be marked with clear audible sound (beep). 

 Every Modern&Contemporary performance can have a title, but it is not mandatory

3. Acrobatics and Lifts: Acrobatic movements are allowed, but should only be used to enhance the routine. Gymnastic lines are not allowed (multiple gymnastic moves, travelling from corner to corner).

Modern and Contemporary Dance should not look like an acrobatic dance routine. (see in General Rules Performing Arts under Acrobatic Movements restriction for Children )

Lifts are allowed in Junior and Adult age divisions and are prohibited in the Children age division.

4. Props and Backgrounds: Stage props are allowed to the extent that the stage setting for the choreography does not overshadow the dance itself. Backgrounds are prohibited.

5. Clothing: aesthetic, tasteful and age division appropriate.

Privacy Settings
We use cookies to enhance your experience while using our website. If you are using our Services via a browser you can restrict, block or remove cookies through your web browser settings. We also use content and scripts from third parties that may use tracking technologies. You can selectively provide your consent below to allow such third party embeds. For complete information about the cookies we use, data we collect and how we process them, please check our Privacy Policy
Youtube
Consent to display content from - Youtube
Vimeo
Consent to display content from - Vimeo
Google Maps
Consent to display content from - Google